SNiP II-23-81* Updated version of SP 16.13330.

2017 Steel structures / II 23

81* 16 13330 2017
ONLINE FIRE RISK AND HEAT FLOW CALCULATORS

•16+

MINISTRY
OF CONSTRUCTION AND HOUSING AND MUNICIPAL
SERVICES OF THE RUSSIAN FEDERATION

(MINISTRY OF CONSTRUCTION OF RUSSIA)

ORDER

from February 27, 2017 No. 126/pr

Moscow

On approval of SP 16.13330.2017
"SNiP II-23-81* Steel structures"

In accordance with the Rules for the development, approval, publication, amendment and cancellation of codes of practice, approved by the Decree
of the Government of the Russian Federation of July 1, 2016 No. 624 , subparagraph 5.2.9 of paragraph 5 of the Regulation on the Ministry of
Construction and Housing and Communal Services of the Russian Federation, approved by the Decree of the Government of the Russian Federation
of November 18, 2013 No. 1038 , paragraph 113 of the Plan for the development and approval of codes of practice and updating of previously
approved building codes and regulations, codes of practice for 2016 and the planning period up to 2017, approved by the Order of the Ministry of
Construction and Housing and Communal Services of the Russian Federation of March 3, 2016 No. 128/pr, I order :

1. To approve and put into effect within 6 months from the date of publication of this order the attached SP 16.13330.2017 “SNiP II-23-81* Steel
structures”.

2. From the moment of entry into force of SP 16.13330.2017 "SNiP II-23-81* Steel structures", SP 16.13330.2011 "SNiP II-23-81* Steel structures",
approved by the order of the Ministry of Regional Development of the Russian Federation dated December 27, 2010 No. 791, shall not be applicable,
with the exception of paragraphs of SP 16.13330.2011 "SNiP II-23-81* Steel structures" included in the List of national standards and codes of
practice (parts of such standards and codes of practice), the application of which, on a mandatory basis, ensures compliance with the requirements
of the Federal Law "Technical Regulations on the Safety of Buildings and Structures", approved by Decree of the Government of the Russian
Federation dated December 26, 2014 No. 1521 (hereinafter referred to as the List), until the appropriate amendments are made to the List.

3. The Department of Urban Development and Architecture shall, within 15 days from the date of issuance of the order, send the approved SP
16.13330.2017 “SNiP II-23-81* Steel structures” for registration to the national standardization body of the Russian Federation.

4. The Department of Urban Development and Architecture shall ensure the publication on the official website of the Ministry of Construction of
Russia in the information and telecommunications network "Internet" of the text of the approved SP 16.13330.2017 "SNiP II-23-81* Steel structures"
in electronic digital form within 10 days from the date of registration of the set of rules by the national standardization body of the Russian Federation.

5. Supervision over the execution of this order shall be assigned to the Deputy Minister of Construction and Housing and Public Utilities of the
Russian Federation, Kh.D. Mavliyarov.

Acting Minister L.O. Stavitsky

 APPROVED

by order of the Ministry of Construction and

housing and communal services

Russian Federation

from February 27, 2017 No. 126/pr

MINISTRY
OF CONSTRUCTION AND HOUSING AND MUNICIPAL
SERVICES OF THE RUSSIAN FEDERATION

SET OF RULES SP 16.13330.2017

STEEL STRUCTURES

Updated edition

SNiP II-23-81*

Moscow 2017

Preface

Information about the code of rules

1 CONTRACTORS - JSC "Research Center "Construction" - Central Research Institute of Building Structures named after V.A. Kucherenko. Moscow
State University of Civil Engineering, St. Petersburg State University of Architecture and Civil Engineering

2 SUBMITTED by the Technical Committee for Standardization TC 465 "Construction"

3 PREPARED for approval by the Department of Urban Development and Architecture of the Ministry of Construction and Housing and Communal
Services of the Russian Federation (Ministry of Construction of Russia)

4 APPROVED by order of the Ministry of Construction and Housing and Communal Services of the Russian Federation dated February 27, 2017 No.
126/pr and entered into force on August 28, 2017.

5 REGISTERED by the Federal Agency for Technical Regulation and Metrology (Rosstandart). Revision of SP 16.13330.2011 "SNiP II-23-81* Steel
structures"

In case of revision (replacement) or cancellation of this set of rules, the corresponding notice will be published in the established order. The
corresponding information, notice and texts are also posted in the public information system - on the official website of the developer (Ministry of
Construction of Russia) on the Internet

CONTENT
1 Scope of application

2 Normative references

3 Terms and definitions

4 General Provisions

4.1 Basic requirements for structures

4.2 Basic calculation requirements

4.3 Taking into account the purpose and operating conditions of structures

5 Materials for structures and connections

6 Calculated characteristics of materials and connections

7 Calculation of steel structure elements under central tension and compression

7.1 Calculation of solid section elements

7.2 Calculation of through-section elements

7.3 Checking the stability of walls and flange sheets of centrally compressed solid section elements

8 Calculation of steel structure elements during bending

8.1 General provisions for calculation

8.2 Strength calculation of bending elements of solid cross-section

8.3 Strength calculation of solid section crane track beams

8.4 Calculation of the overall stability of bending elements of solid cross-section

8.5 Checking the stability of walls and flange sheets of solid section bending elements

8.6 Calculation of support plates

9 Calculation of elements of steel structures under the action of longitudinal force with bending

9.1 Strength calculation of solid section elements

9.2 Calculation of stability of solid section elements

9.3 Calculation of stability of through-section elements

9.4 Checking the stability of walls and belts

10 Design lengths and ultimate slenderness of steel structure elements

10.1 Calculated lengths of flat truss elements, column branches and braces

10.2 Calculated lengths of elements of spatial lattice structures, including structural ones

10.3 Calculated lengths of columns (posts)

10.4 Limit slenderness of elements

11 Calculation of sheet structures

11.1 Strength calculation

11.2 Stability calculation

12 Calculation of steel structure elements for fatigue

12.1 General provisions for calculation

12.2 Calculation of crane track beams

13 Design of steel structures to prevent brittle fracture

 14 Design of steel structure connections

14.1 Welded joints

14.2 Bolted connections

14.3 Friction joints (on bolts with controlled tension)

14.4 Belt connections in composite beams

15 Requirements for the design of buildings, structures and constructions

15.1 Distances between expansion joints

15.2 Trusses and structural roof slabs

15.3 Columns

15.4 Connections

15.5 Yes

15.6 Crane track beams

15.7 Sheet structures

15.8 Hanging coverings

15.9 Flanged connections

15.10 Connections with milled ends

15.11 Mounting fasteners

15.12 Support parts

16 Requirements for the design of structures of supports for overhead power transmission lines, open switchgear and transport contact networks

17 Requirements for the design of structures of communication antenna structures up to 500 m high

18 Requirements for the design of structures of buildings and structures during reconstruction

18.1 General Provisions

18.2 Design characteristics of steel and connections

18.3 Strengthening of structures

Appendix A. Basic letter designations of quantities

Appendix B. Physical properties of materials for steel structures

Appendix B. Materials for steel structures and their design resistances

Appendix G. Materials for connections of steel structures

Appendix D. Coefficients for calculating the stability of centrally and eccentrically compressed elements

Appendix E. Coefficients for calculating structural elements taking into account the development of plastic deformations

Appendix G. Bending stability coefficient φ b

Appendix I. Coefficients of the calculated length μ of sections of stepped columns

Appendix K. To the calculation of elements for fatigue

Bibliography

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

Introduction
This set of rules has been developed in accordance with the Federal Law of December 30, 2009 No. 384-FZ “Technical Regulations on the Safety of
Buildings and Structures”.

The revision of SP 16.13330.2011 was carried out by a team of authors of JSC Research Center for Construction - V.A. Kucherenko Central
Research Institute of Steel Structures (Dr. of Engineering I.I. Vedyakov , Dr. of Engineering P.D. Odesskiy ; Ph.D. of Engineering M.I. Gukova , Ph.D.
of Engineering D.V. Konin , Ph.D. of Engineering M.R. Uritskiy , Ph.D. of Engineering M.I. Farfel , Ph.D. of Engineering B.S. Tsetlin ; Engineer S.V.
Gurov ); NRU MGSU (Dr. of Engineering A.R. Tusnin ); CJSC Erkon (Dr. of Engineering G.I. Bely ); ARSS (Eng. D.S. Eremeev , Engineer A.A.
Soskov ).

Amendment No. 1 to this set of rules was developed by a team of authors of JSC Research Center “Construction” - V.A. Kucherenko Central
Research Institute of Building Structures (head - Doctor of Technical Sciences I.I. Vedyakov ; implementers - Doctor of Technical Sciences P.D.
Odesskiy , PhD in Technical Sciences M.I. Gukova , PhD in Technical Sciences D.V. Konin , PhD in Technical Sciences M.R. Uritskiy , PhD in
Technical Sciences M.I. Farfel , PhD in Technical Sciences D.V. Soloviev , S.V. Gurov ).

Amendment No. 2 to SP 16.13330.2017 was developed by a team of authors: JSC Research Center for Construction - Kucherenko Central Research
Institute of Steel Structures (Head - Dr. of Engineering Sciences I.I. Vedyakov ; Performers - Dr. of Engineering Sciences P.D. Odesskiy , Ph.D. of
Engineering Sciences M.I. Gukova , Ph.D. of Engineering Sciences D.V. Konin , Ph.D. of Engineering Sciences M.R. Uritskiy , Ph.D. of Engineering
Sciences M.I. Farfel , Ph.D. of Engineering Sciences E.R. Matselinskiy ; S.V. Gurov ); NIPI ERKON LLC (Dr. of Engineering Sciences G.I. Bely ); PO
Energozhelezobetoninvest LLC ( K.P. Romanov ); LLC "Firm Unicon" (PhD V.V. Katyushin ).

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

Code of rules

STEEL STRUCTURES

Steel structures

Date of introduction 2017-08-28

1 Scope of application
1.1 This set of rules establishes requirements and applies to the design and calculation of steel building structures of buildings and structures for
various purposes operating at temperatures no higher than 100 °C and no lower than minus 60 °C.

This code of practice does not apply to the design of steel structures of bridges, transport tunnels and pipes under embankments.

1.2 When designing structures that are subject to special operating conditions (e.g. blast furnace structures; main and process pipelines; special-
purpose reservoirs; building structures subject to seismic impacts, intense exposure to fire, temperature, radiation, aggressive environments;
structures of hydraulic engineering and melioration structures), structures of unique buildings and structures, nuclear power plant buildings, as well as
special types of structures (e.g. prestressed, spatial, hanging, steel-reinforced concrete, thin-walled steel made of cold-formed galvanized sections
and corrugated sheets with self-tapping screws), the requirements provided for by the relevant regulatory documents that reflect the operating
features of these structures must be observed.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

2 Normative references
This set of rules contains references to the following regulatory documents:

GOST 839-80 Uninsulated wires for overhead power lines. Technical conditions

GOST 2601-84 Welding of metals. Terms and definitions of basic concepts

GOST 3822-79 Bimetallic steel-copper wire. Technical conditions

GOST 19425-74 Special steel I-beams and channels. Assortment

GOST 27751-2014 Reliability of building structures and foundations. Basic provisions.

GOST 27772-2015 Rolled products for building steel structures. General specifications

GOST R 54864-2016 Seamless hot-deformed steel pipes for welded steel building structures. Technical conditions

GOST R 57837-2017 Hot-rolled steel I-beams with parallel flange faces. Technical conditions

GOST R 58064-2018 Welded steel pipes for building structures. Technical conditions

GOST 28548-90 Steel pipes. Terms and definitions

GOST R ISO 857-1-2009 Welding and allied processes. Vocabulary. Part 1. Welding processes for metals. Terms and definitions

GOST R ISO 17659-2009 Welding. Multilingual terms for welded joints

SP 14.13330.2018 "SNiP II-7-81* Construction in seismic areas

SP 20.13330.2016 "SNiP 2.01.07-85* Loads and impacts" (with amendments No. 1, No. 2)

SP 22.13330.2016 "SNiP 2.02.01-83* Foundations of buildings and structures"

SP 28.13330.2017 "SNiP 2.03.11-85 Protection of building structures from corrosion"

SP 35.13330.2011 “SNiP 2.05.03-84* Bridges and Pipes” (with Amendment No. 1)

SP 43.13330.2012 "SNiP 2.09.03-85 Industrial Enterprise Structures" (with amendments No. 1, No. 2)

SP 70.13330.2012 "SNiP 3.03.01-87 Load-bearing and enclosing structures" (with amendments No. 1, No. 3)

SP 131.13330.2018 "SNiP 23-01-99* Construction climatology"

SP 260.1325800.2016 Thin-walled steel structures made of cold-formed galvanized sections and corrugated sheets. Design rules (with amendment
No. 1)

SP 266.1325800.2016 Steel-reinforced concrete structures. Design rules (with amendment No. 1)

SP 294.1325800.2017 Steel structures. Design rules (with amendment No. 1)

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

Note — When using this set of rules, it is advisable to check the validity of referenced documents in the public information system — on the official
website of the federal executive body in the field of standardization on the Internet or in the annual information index "National Standards" published
as of January 1 of the current year, and in the issues of the monthly information index "National Standards" for the current year. If a referenced
document to which an undated reference is given has been replaced, it is recommended to use the current version of this document taking into
account all the changes made to this version. If a referenced document to which a dated reference is given has been replaced, it is recommended to
use the version of this document with the year of approval (adoption) indicated above. If, after the approval of this set of rules, a change is made to a
referenced document to which a dated reference is given that affects the provision to which the reference is given, it is recommended to apply this
provision without taking into account this change. If a referenced document is cancelled without replacement, it is recommended to apply the
provision in which a reference to it is given in the part that does not affect this reference. It is advisable to check information about the validity of
codes of practice in the Federal Information Fund of Standards.

3 Terms and definitions

In this set of rules, the terms of GOST 2601 , GOST R ISO 857-1 , GOST R ISO 17659 and GOST 28548 are used .

4 General Provisions

4.1 Basic requirements for structures

4.1.1 When designing steel building structures, the following should be observed:

adopt design schemes that ensure the strength, stability and spatial stability of buildings and structures as a whole and their individual elements
during transportation, installation and operation;

comply with the requirements of SP 28.13330 regarding the protection of building structures from corrosion;

comply with the requirements [ 1 ];

take into account their fire resistance and ensure their fire protection in accordance with the fire protection system of the facilities;

use weather-resistant (corrosion-resistant) and fire-resistant steels, provide for an increase in the thickness of rolled products and pipe walls to
protect against corrosion and increase the fire resistance limit of structures only with a technical and economic justification;

justify the increase in the calculated thickness of rolled products and pipe walls with requirements for corrosion protection and increasing the fire
resistance limit of structures;

perform calculations of the accuracy of the dimensions of structures and their elements during technical justification in accordance with regulatory
documents.
It is not permitted to provide for the use of reconditioned steel pipes and other used types of metal structures in design and working documentation
for the construction, reconstruction and major repairs of buildings and structures of increased and normal levels of responsibility, as well as in the
construction and operation of particularly dangerous, technically complex and unique facilities.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

4.1.1a When designing thin-walled steel structures from cold-formed galvanized sections and corrugated sheets, it is necessary to comply with the
requirements of SP 260.1325800 . When designing steel-reinforced concrete structures, the requirements of SP 266.1325800 must be observed .

(Added additionally. Amendment No. 2 )

4.1.2 Steel structures of open (operated outdoors, i.e. not protected from atmospheric influences) buildings (crane overpasses, transmission line
supports, pipeline and tank supports, service platforms, shelves, canopies, etc.) must be accessible for observation, technical condition assessment,
preventive and repair work and must not retain moisture or impede ventilation. These requirements do not apply to structures walled up in concrete or
brickwork, or in other ways, faced with sheet materials and operated inside a heated building.

The ends of closed-section structures must have plugs, except for structural elements subject to hot-dip galvanizing.

(New edition. Amendment No. 2 )

4.1.3 Working drawings of structures must comply with the requirements of regulatory documents on the manufacture, quality and installation ( SP
70.13330 ) of steel building structures.

In working drawings of structures (KM and KMD) and in documentation for ordering materials, the following should be indicated:

steel and the requirements for them provided for by this set of rules;

method of making welded joints, type (method) of welding; types, brands, diameters of electrodes, position of the weld during welding, type of
backing for butt welds;

strength and precision classes of bolts; when using bolts with controlled tension - the pre-tensioning force and the method of controlling the bolt
tension;

method of preparing contact surfaces for friction connections;

the location and dimensions of welded, bolted and friction joints, indicating whether they were made in factory or installation conditions and, in certain
cases, the sequence of applying seams and installing bolts;

methods and scope of quality control during manufacturing and installation;

requirements for protection of structures from corrosion;

fire protection requirements.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

4.2 Basic calculation requirements

4.2.1 Steel structures and their calculations must meet the reliability requirements of GOST 27751 .

The calculation of steel structures should be carried out taking into account the purpose of the structures, the conditions of their manufacture,
transportation, installation and operation, as well as the properties of the materials.

The calculation schemes must take into account the deformation characteristics of the supporting structures, foundations and bases.

4.2.2 When calculating structures, the values ​of loads and impacts, as well as the maximum values ​of deflections and displacements of structural
elements should be taken in accordance with SP 20.13330 , SP 43.13330 and sections 16 and 17 .

4.2.3 The calculated temperature in the construction area should be taken as the outside air temperature of the coldest day with a probability of 0.98,
determined in accordance with SP 131.13330 .

The calculated process temperature is established in the assignment for the development of the construction part of the project.

4.2.4 Calculation schemes and basic calculation assumptions must reflect the actual operating conditions of steel structures.

The following calculation models of load-bearing structures are considered:

individual structural rod elements (stretched, compressed, eccentrically compressed, compressed-bending and bending);

flat or spatial systems, braced (non-free - Figure 1 , a ); the calculation of such structures is performed by calculating individual elements taking into
account their interaction with each other and with the base according to SP 22.13330 ;
flat or spatial systems, unbraced (free - Figure 1 , b ); when calculating such structures, along with checking individual elements, the possibility of
reaching the limit state of the system as a whole should be taken into account;

sheet structures (shells of revolution).

Figure 1 - Schemes of systems secured ( a ) and not secured from

movement ( b )

When modeling the nonlinear operation of steel for calculations for the first group of limit states, the design diagram of steel operation in generalized
parameters and , presented in Figure B.1 (Appendix B ) should be used. The value of the corresponding coordinates of the
characteristic points of the diagram should be taken from Table B.9 . Calculations are performed using one of three curve options: OBD, OACD,
OACDEF, depending on the class of structural elements ( 4.2.7 ).

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

4.2.5 Spatial steel structures should be calculated as single systems, taking into account the factors that determine the stress and strain states, the
joint work of the structural elements with each other and with the foundation.

When calculating spatial structures (membranes, plates, shells), as well as structures with elements with a nonlinear deformation diagram, the
influence of geometric and physical nonlinearity should be taken into account.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

4.2.6 The load-bearing capacity and rigidity of industrial building frames are ensured across the building by transverse frames consisting of columns
(frame posts) and crossbars in the form of trusses or solid-wall sections (beams), and along the building by frame elements (crane structures, purlin
trusses, connections between columns and trusses, roof purlins or ribs of steel roofing panels).

The overall stability of the frame according to the undeformed scheme should be assessed for: frame (with rigid nodes connecting the beams to the
columns), frame-braced (frame frame with vertical stiffening diaphragms or rigid inserts) or braced (with hinged nodes connecting the beams to the
columns) systems, which include longitudinal and transverse frames and ties installed in accordance with 15.4 .

In a frame-braced or braced system, when the nodes of the braced block do not coincide with the nodes of the frame, the calculation should be
performed according to a deformed scheme (taking into account the geometric nonlinearity of the system).

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

4.2.7 The structural elements considered in this set of rules, depending on the stress-strain state (SSS) of the design section, are divided into three
classes:

1st class - VAT, in which the stresses over the entire cross-sectional area do not exceed the design resistance of the steel | σ | ≤ R y (elastic state of
the section);

2nd class - VAT, in which in one part of the section | σ | < R y , and in the other | σ | = R y (elastic-plastic state of the section);

3rd class - SSS, in which over the entire cross-sectional area | σ | = R y (plastic state of the section, conditional plastic hinge).

4.2.8. The letter designations of quantities used in this set of rules are given in Appendix A.
4.3 Taking into account the purpose and operating conditions of structures
4.3.1 Depending on the purpose, operating conditions and the presence of welded joints, structures should be divided into four groups in accordance
with Appendix B.

4.3.2 When calculating structures and connections, the following should be taken into account:

reliability factors for responsibility γ n , adopted in accordance with the requirements of GOST 27751 ;

safety factor γ u = 1.3 for structural elements calculated for strength using design resistances R u ;

coefficients of working conditions of structural elements and connections γ c , γ c 1 and γ b , taken according to Table 1 ; clause 7.1.2 ; Table 45 and
sections 14 , 16 , 17 and 18 .

The ratio of the critical load to the design load for rod structures calculated as idealized spatial systems using certified computing systems (according
to 4.2.5 , 4.2.6 ) must not be less than the reliability factor for the stability of the system as a whole γ s = 1.3.

4.3.3 When designing structures that are directly exposed to moving, vibrating and other variable loads that cause metal fatigue, design solutions
should be used that do not cause significant stress concentration, and in the cases specified in this set of rules, fatigue calculations should be
performed.

Table 1

Elements of construction Working

conditions
coefficients γ with

1 Solid section beams and compressed elements of floor trusses under theater halls, clubs, cinemas, under stands, under 0,90
shop premises, book depositories and archives, etc. with a temporary load not exceeding the weight of the floors

2 Columns

public and residential buildings with a constant load equal to at least 0.8 of the calculated load; 0,95

multi-storey buildings up to 150 m in height inclusive; 0,95

I-section of multi-storey buildings over 150 m high; 0,90

box-shaped section of multi-storey buildings over 150 m high; 0,87

water tower supports 0,95

3 Columns of single-storey industrial buildings with overhead cranes 1,05

4 Compressed main elements (except for supporting ones) of a lattice of a composite T- section made of two angles in 0,80
welded roof and floor trusses when calculating the stability of the specified elements with flexibility λ > 60

5 Tensile elements (ties, rods, guy wires, hangers) when calculating the strength of an unweakened section 0,90

6 Elements of structures made of steel with a yield strength of up to 440 N/mm2 , bearing a static load, when calculating the 1,10
strength of a section weakened by holes for bolts (except for friction joints)

7 Compressed lattice elements of spatial lattice structures made of single angles, attached by one shelf (for unequal-flange
angles - by a larger shelf):

a) directly to the belts with welded seams or two or more bolts installed along the corner:
 diagonals according to figure 15 , a and spacers according to figure 15 , b , c , e 0,90

diagonals according to figure 15 , c , g , d , e 0,80

b) directly to the belts with one bolt or through packaging, regardless of the type of connection 0.75 0,75

8 Compressed elements made of single angles, attached by one flange (for unequal angles - by a smaller flange), with the 0,75
exception of elements of flat trusses made of single angles and elements specified in position 7 of this table, diagonals
according to Figure 15 , 6 attached directly to the chords by welded seams or by two or more bolts installed along the angle,
and flat trusses made of single angles

9 Support plates made of steel with a yield strength of up to 390 N/mm2 , bearing a static load, thickness, mm:

a) to 40 1,20

b) over 40 to 60 1,15

c) » 60 » 80 1,10

Notes

1 Coefficients γ with < 1 should not be taken into account jointly in the calculation.

2 When calculating the strength of a section weakened by bolt holes, the service factor factors given in items 6 and 1; 6 and 2; 6 and 3 should be
taken into account together.

3 When calculating support plates, the coefficients given in positions 9 and 2, 9 and 3 should be taken into account together.

4 The coefficients for the elements given in positions 1 and 2 should also be taken into account when calculating their connections.

5 In cases not specified in this table, γ c = 1 should be taken in the formulas.

4.3.4 When designing structures erected or operated in low temperature conditions ( t < -45 °C), at which the possibility of brittle fracture increases,
the requirements for the material, design and manufacturing technology should be taken into account.

4.3.5 When designing welded structures, it is necessary to reduce the harmful effects of residual deformations and stresses, including welding, as
well as stress concentrations, by providing for appropriate design solutions (with the most uniform distribution of stresses in elements and parts,
without reentrant angles, sharp cross-section differences and other stress concentrators) and technological measures (assembly and welding
procedure, preliminary bending, mechanical processing of the relevant zones by gouging, milling, cleaning with an abrasive wheel, etc.).

5 Materials for structures and connections

5.1 The physical characteristics of materials used for steel structures should be taken in accordance with Tables B.1 and B.2 (Appendix B).

5.2 When assigning steel for structures, the group of structures, design temperature, impact toughness requirements and chemical composition in
accordance with Appendix B should be taken into account .

5.3 For structures, it is necessary to use shaped (angles, I-beams, channels), sheet, wide-strip universal rolled products and bent sections; thin sheet
rolled products made of carbon steel and high-strength steel; cold-formed sections; bent closed square and rectangular sections; rolled products
(circle, square, strip) in accordance with the current regulatory documents (ND); electric-welded and hot-deformed seamless pipes - in accordance
with Tables B.1 and B.2 (Appendix B).

Other materials, with a certificate of conformity in the established form, should be used provided that the requirements of Appendix B for mechanical
properties and chemical composition are met.

Depending on the design and assembly features, when ordering steel, the classification of sheet metal products should be taken into account
depending on the value of the relative contraction ψ z (see 13.4 ) in accordance with the current standard.

To ensure the fire resistance limit (45 min) for all groups, according to Appendix B, open structures (see 4.1.2 ), regardless of the design temperature,
rolled products made of steel C 355P or rolled products made of other steels that ensure a fire resistance limit of 45 min should be designated.
5.4 For castings (support parts, etc.), steel should be used that meets the requirements of current standards for group II (critical-purpose castings for
parts designed for strength, operating under static and variable loads) or III (especially critical-purpose castings for parts designed for strength,
operating under dynamic loads). The design resistances of gray cast iron castings should be taken from Table B.8 .

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

5.5 For welding steel structures, the following should be used: electrodes for manual arc welding; welding wire; fluxes; flux-cored wire for automatic
and mechanized welding in accordance with Table G.1 (Appendix G), as well as carbon dioxide and argon in accordance with current standards.

The welding materials and welding technology used must ensure that the value of the ultimate strength of the weld metal is not lower than the
standard value of the ultimate strength R un of the base metal, as well as the values ​of hardness, impact toughness and relative elongation of the
metal of the welded joints established by the relevant regulatory documents.

5.6 For bolted connections, steel bolts, nuts and washers that meet the technical requirements of current regulatory documents and standards, as
well as bolts, nuts and washers specified in 5.7 , should be used .

Bolts should be used according to Table G.3 .

When bolts are subjected to shear and tension, the strength classes of nuts should be taken in accordance with the strength class of the bolts: 5 - at
5.6; 8 - at 8.8; 10 - at 10.9; 12 - at 12.9.

When bolts are used only for shear, the strength class of nuts is used for the strength class of bolts: 4 - for 5.6 and 5.8; 5 - for 8.8; 8 - for 10.9; 10 - for
12.9.

Washers should be used: round, oblique and spring normal in accordance with current standards.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

5.7 For friction and flange connections, bolts of strength classes 8.8, 10.9, 12.9, nuts and washers of the corresponding classes, with a design and
dimensions that meet current standards, should be used.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

5.8 Steel grades for foundation bolts, their design and dimensions should be selected in accordance with current standards and the requirements
given in Table G.4 (Appendix G).

Bolts (U-shaped) for fastening guy wires of communication antenna structures, as well as U-shaped and foundation bolts of supports of overhead
power transmission lines and distribution devices should be used from steel grades specified in Table G.4 (Appendix G).

Anchor bolts should be used in accordance with the requirements of SP 43.13330 .

5.9 Nuts for foundation and U-bolts should be used in accordance with the relevant technical requirements of current standards.

For foundation bolts made of steel St3ps2, St3sp2, St3ps4, St3sp4 with a diameter of up to 48 mm, nuts of strength class 4 should be used; with a
diameter over 48 mm, nuts made of material not lower than group 02 according to the relevant standard.

For foundation bolts up to 48 mm in diameter made of grade 09G2S steel and other steels, nuts of strength class no lower than 5 should be used,
with a diameter over 48 mm - made of material no lower than group 05 according to the relevant standard. Nuts should be made of steel grades
accepted for bolts.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

5.10 For hinges, rollers and bolts that function as hinges, as well as backing sheets under rollers, forgings according to SP 35.13330 should be used
.

5.11 For load-bearing elements of suspended roofs, guy wires of overhead power transmission line supports, switchgear, transport contact networks,
masts and towers, as well as prestressed elements in prestressed structures, in accordance with current standards, the following should be used:

spiral ropes;

double twist ropes;

closed load-bearing ropes;

bundles and strands of parallel wires formed from rope wire.

6 Calculated characteristics of materials and connections

6.1 The design resistances of rolled products, bent sections and pipes for various types of stress states should be determined using the formulas
given in Table 2, where the standard resistances R yn and R un should be taken in accordance with ND.

Table 2
 State of stress Calculated resistance of rolled products and pipes

Tension, compression, bending:

at the yield point R y = R yn / γ m

by temporary resistance Ru = Run/γm

Shift Rs = 0,58Ryn/γm

Calculation

end surface (if there is a fit) Rp = Run/γm

local in cylindrical joints (trunnions) Rtp = 0,5Run/γm

with close contact

Diametrical compression of rollers (with free contact in structures with limited mobility) Red = 0,025Run/γm

The values ​of the reliability factors for the material γ m of rolled products, bent sections and pipes should be taken from Table 3.

Table 3

Conditions for control of rolled product properties Material safety

factor γ m

For rolling during statistical procedure of control of its properties 1,025

For rolled products that do not use a statistical procedure for monitoring their properties with a yield strength of over 380 1,100
N/mm2 , and for hot-deformed pipes

For other rolled products and pipes that meet the requirements of this set of rules 1,050

For rolled products and pipes supplied according to foreign regulatory documentation 1,050

For rolled products and pipes used in structures of class KS-1 ( GOST 27751 ) with a limited service life and the presence of 1,200
people in them (sheet pile walls of pits, temporary supports, etc.)

Amended edition. Am. No. 2 )

The values ​of standard and calculated resistance to tension, compression and bending of sheet, wide-strip universal rolled products and pipes are
given in Table B.3 , and for shaped rolled products - in Tables B.4 and B.5 (Appendix B).

The values ​of the calculated resistance of rolled products to end surface crushing, local crushing in cylindrical hinges and diametrical compression of
rollers are given in Table B.6 (Appendix B).

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

6.2 The design resistances of bent sections should be taken as equal to the design resistances of the sheet metal from which they are made.

6.3 The values ​of the calculated resistances of carbon steel castings should be taken from Table B.7 (Appendix B).

6.4 The design resistances of welded joints for joints of different types and stress states should be determined using the formulas given in Table 4.
Table 4

Welded State of stress Characteristic of the Calculated resistances

joints calculated resistance of welded joints

Butt joints Compression, tension and bending during automatic, mechanized or At the yield point Ry=Ry
manual welding during weld quality control using non-destructive methods

By temporary resistance R wu = R u

Stretching and bending in automatic, mechanized or manual welding At the yield point R egg = 0,85 R y

Shift Rws = Rs

With corner Cut (conditional) On the weld metal

seams

By metal fusion R wz = 0.45 R un

boundaries

Note - The values ​of the safety factors for the weld metal γ wm should be taken as: 1.25 - for R wun ≤ 490 N/mm 2 ; 1.35 - for R wun ≥ 590 N/mm 2 .

The design resistance of a welded butt joint of elements made of steels with different standard resistances should be taken as for a butt joint made of
steel with a lower standard resistance value.

The values ​of the standard R w un and calculated R wf resistances of the metal of corner welds are given in Table G.2 (Appendix G).

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

6.5 The design resistances of a single-bolt connection should be determined using the formulas given in Table 5.

Table 5

State of stress Conventional Calculated resistances of single-bolt connections

designation

shear and tension of bolts of strength classes crushing of the connected

elements

5,6 5,8 8,8 10,9 12,9

Slice Rbs 0,42Rbun 0.41 R 0.40 R good 0.35 R -

bun bun

Stretching R bt 0.45 R - 0.54 R 0.7 R bun -

bun bun

Account: Rbp* - 1.60 R u

a) bolts of precision
class A

b) bolts of precision - 1.35 R u

class B

R bp * should be determined for connected elements made of steel with a yield strength of up to 440 N/mm 2 .
The values ​of the standard and calculated resistance to shear and tension of steel bolts in single-bolt connections are given in Table G.5 , and the
values ​of the resistance to crushing of elements connected by bolts are given in Table G.6 (Appendix G).

6.6 The calculated tensile strength of foundation and anchor bolts R b a should be determined using the formula

R b а = 0,8 R in . (1)

The values ​of the calculated tensile strengths of foundation bolts are given in Table G.7 (Appendix G).

The design tensile strength of U -bolts R bu , specified in 5.8 , should be determined using the formula

R bu = 0.85 R yn . (2)

6.7 (Excluded. Amendment No. 2 )

6.8 The calculated tensile strength of high-strength steel wire R dh , used in the form of bundles or strands, should be determined using the formula

R dh = 0.63 R un , (4)

6.9 The value of the calculated resistance (effort) to stretching of a steel cable should be taken as equal to the value of the breaking force of the
cable as a whole, established by the regulatory documents for steel cables, divided by the material safety factor γ m = 1.6.

7 Calculation of steel structure elements under central tension and compression

7.1 Calculation of solid section elements

7.1.1 The strength calculation of steel elements with standard resistance R yn ≤ 440 N/mm 2 under central tension or compression by force N should
be performed according to the formula

(5)

The strength calculation of stretched elements, the use of which is possible even after the metal has reached the yield point, as well as stretched or
compressed elements made of steel with a standard resistance R yn > 440 N/mm 2 should be performed using formula ( 5 ) with the value of R y
replaced by R u / γ u .

7.1.2 The strength calculation of sections at the attachment points of tensioned elements made of single angles, fastened with one flange with bolts,
should be performed according to formula ( 5 ), and the sections of a tensioned single angle made of steel with a yield strength of up to 380 N/mm2 ,
fastened with one flange with bolts placed in one row along an axis located at a distance of at least 0.5 b ( b is the width of the flange of the angle)
from the butt of the angle and at least 1.2 d ( d is the diameter of the hole for the bolt, taking into account the positive tolerance) from the feather of
the angle, according to the formula

(6)

где γ c 1 = ( α 1 А n 1 / А n + α 2 ) b .

Here A n is the net cross-sectional area of ​the angle;

A n 1 is the area of ​the section of the attached shelf of the corner between the edge of the hole and the feather;

α 1 , α 2 , β - coefficients taken from Table 6.

Table 6
 Coefficient Values ​of the coefficients α 1 , α 2 and β

with one bolt and distance a equal to for a ≥ 1.5 d and s ≥ 2 d with the number of bolts in a row

1.35 d * 1.5 days 2d 2 3 4

a1 1,70 1,70 1,70 1,77 1,45 1,17

a2 0,05 0,05 0,05 0,19 0,36 0,47

b 0,65 0,85 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0

___________

* Only for grating elements (braces and spacers), except for those constantly working in tension, with a shelf thickness of up to 6 mm.

Designations adopted in Table 6:

" a " - the distance along the force from the edge of the element to the center of the nearest hole;

" s " - distance along the force between the centers of the holes.

When calculating rods and crossarm belts, elements of overhead power line supports, switchgear and control gear, directly adjacent to wire
attachment points, as well as elements connecting rod attachment points and stretched crossarm belts in racks, the coefficient γ from 1 should be
reduced by 10%.

7.1.3 Calculation of the stability of solid section elements under central compression by force N and satisfying the requirements of 7.3.2 - 7.3.9
should be performed according to the formula

(7)

where φ is the coefficient of stability under central compression, the value of which for ≥ 0.6 should be determined by the formula

(8)

The value of the coefficient δ in formula ( 8 ) should be calculated using the formula

(9)

where is the conditional flexibility of the rod;

α and β are coefficients determined according to Table 7 depending on the types of sections.

The values ​of the coefficient φ , calculated using formula ( 8 ), should be taken as no more than 7.6/ for values ​of conditional flexibility greater
than 3.8; 4.4 and 5.8 for section types a , b and c , respectively.

For values ​< 0.6 for section types a and b, φ = 1 should be taken .

The values ​of the coefficient φ calculated using formula ( 8 ) are given in Table D.1 (Appendix D).

Table 7

Section type Value of the coefficient

 designation form a b

a 0,03 0,06

b 0,04 0,09

c 0,04 0,14

Notes

1 The values ​of the coefficients for rolled I-beams with a height of over 500 mm when calculating stability in the plane of the wall should be taken
according to the type of section a.

2. In the figures of this table, the axes “x-x” and “yy” are designated in the sections to which the calculation plane is located normally for
determining φ according to formula ( 8 ); in the remaining sections, the coefficients do not depend on the calculation plane.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

7.1.4 The calculation of the stability of rods made of single angles should be carried out taking into account the requirements of 7.1.3 . When
determining the flexibility of these rods, the radius of gyration of the angle section and the calculated length should be taken in accordance with
10.1.4 and 10.2.1 .

When calculating belts and lattice elements of spatial structures made of single angles, the requirements of 16.12 should be met .

7.1.5 Compressed elements with solid walls of an open U-shaped section (Figure 2 ) should be reinforced with strips or lattice, while the
requirements of 7.2.2 ; 7.2.3 ; 7.2.7 and 7.2.8 must be met .

a) - open; b), c) - reinforced with planks or gratings

Figure 2 - U-shaped sections of elements

In the absence of planks or gratings, such elements, in addition to calculations using formula ( 7 ) in the main planes x - x and y - y , should be
checked for stability in the bending-torsional mode of stability loss using the formula

(10)

here φ c is a coefficient taken equal to

 φ c = φ 1 at φ 1 ≤ 0.85;

φc = (0,68 + 0,21φ1) ≤ 1 при φ1 > 0,85,

where the value of φ 1 should be calculated using the formula

(11)

In formula ( 11 ), the coefficient c max should be determined according to Appendix D.

7.1.6 The connection of the belt with the wall in a centrally compressed element of a composite solid section should be calculated using the formulas
in Table 43 for the shear from the conditional transverse force Q f ic , determined using formula ( 18 ), while the coefficient φ should be taken in the
plane of the wall.

7.2 Calculation of through-section elements

7.2.1 The strength calculation of through-section elements under central tension and compression should be performed using formula ( 5 ), where A n
is the net cross-sectional area of ​the entire rod.

7.2.2 The calculation of the stability of compressed bars of a through section, the branches of which are connected by strips or gratings, should be
performed using formula ( 7 ); in this case, the coefficient φ relative to the free axis (perpendicular to the plane of the strips or gratings) should be
determined using formulas ( 8 ) and ( 9 ) for type b sections , replacing in them with The value should be determined depending on the
values ​of λ ef given in Table 8 for bars with at least six panels.

The stability calculation for through rods with a number of panels less than six should be performed:

for planks - as calculation of frame systems;

for gratings - according to the requirements of 7.2.5 .

7.2.3 In through bars with strips, the conditional flexibility of an individual branch , or (see Table 8 ) in the section between the welded
seams or the outer bolts fastening the strips, must be no more than 1.4.

If there is a solid sheet in one of the planes instead of planks (see Figure 2 , b ) and c ), the flexibility of the branch should be calculated based on the
radius of inertia of the half-section relative to its central axis, perpendicular to the plane of the planks.

7.2.4 In through bars with lattices, in addition to calculating the stability of the bar as a whole, the stability of individual branches in the sections
between nodes should be checked. The influence of moments in the nodes should be taken into account, for example, from the misalignment of the
lattice elements.

In through bars with lattices, the conditional flexibility of individual branches between nodes should be no more than 2.7 and should not exceed the
conditional reduced flexibility of the bar as a whole.

Higher values ​of conditional flexibility of branches, but not more than 4.1, should be accepted provided that the calculation of such rods is performed
in accordance with the requirements of 7.2.5 .

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

7.2.5 The calculation of through rods with gratings, taking into account the information specified in 7.2.2 and 7.2.4, should be performed using
formula ( 7 ) with the value of R y replaced in it by R yd = φ 1 R y .

In this case, the stability coefficient φ 1 for a separate branch at ≤ 2.7 should be taken as 1.0, and at ≥ 3.2, it should be determined using
formula ( 8 ) with a calculated length of l ef = 0.74 l b , where l b is the length of the branch (in Figure 3 , and the length of the branch is 2 l b ).

In the range of conditional slendernesses 2.7 < < 3.2, the value of φ 1 should be determined by linear interpolation between 1.0 and the value of φ
1 at = 3.2.
 a) - triangular; b) - triangular with spacers;
c) - cross-shaped; d) - cross-shaped with spacers

Figure 3 - Schemes of lattices of through rods

Table 8

Section type Sectional diagram Reduced flexibility λ ef of a through-section rod

with planks with bars

1 (12) (15)

Where Where

2 (13) (16)

Where Where

( d 1 and d 2 refer to sides b 1 and b 2

respectively )

3 (14) (17)

Where Where
 Designations adopted in Table 8:

λ y - the flexibility of the through rod as a whole in the plane perpendicular to the y - y axis ;

λ max is the greatest flexibility of the through rod as a whole in planes perpendicular to the axes x - x or y - y ;

λ b 1 , λ b 2 , λ b 3 - the flexibility of individual branches during bending in planes perpendicular to axes 1-1, 2-2 and 3-3, respectively, in areas
between welded seams or extreme bolts attaching the strips;

b , ( b 1 , b 2 ) - distance between branch axes;

d , l b - dimensions determined from figures 3 and 4 ;

A - cross-sectional area of ​the entire rod;

A d 1 , A d 2 - cross-sectional areas of the lattice diagonals (for a cross lattice - two diagonals), located respectively in planes perpendicular to axes
1-1 and 2-2;

A d 3 is the cross-sectional area of ​the lattice diagonal (for a cross lattice - two diagonals), lying in the plane of one face (for a triangular equilateral
rod);

I b 1 , I b 3 - moments of inertia of the cross-section of branches relative to axes 1-1 and 3-3, respectively (for cross-sections of types 1 and 3);

I b 1 , I b 2 - the same, two angles relative to axes 1-1 and 2-2, respectively (for section type 2);

I s - the moment of inertia of the section of one bar relative to its own axis x - x (Figure 4 ; for sections of types 1 and 3);

I s 1 , I s 2 - the moment of inertia of the section of one of the planks located in planes perpendicular to the axes 1-1 and 2-2, respectively (for
section type 2).

Note - Type 1 should also include sections in which I-beams, tubular and other profiles are used instead of channels for one or both branches; in
this case, the axes y - y and 1-1 must pass through the centers of gravity of the section as a whole and of an individual branch, respectively, and
the values ​of n and λ b 1 in formula ( 12 ) must ensure the greatest value of λ ef .

Figure 4 - Through rod with strips

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

7.2.6 The calculation of rods of composite sections made of angles, channels, etc., connected by walls tightly or through gaskets, should be
performed as solid-walled, provided that the sections between the connecting welds or the centers of the outer bolts do not exceed 40 i for
compressed elements and 80 i for stretched elements . Here, the radius of gyration of the section i of an angle or channel should be taken for T- or I-
sections relative to an axis parallel to the plane of the gaskets, and for cross sections - the minimum.

In this case, at least two intermediate connections (gaskets) should be provided within the length of the compressed element.

7.2.7 The calculation of connecting strips and elements of lattices of compressed rods of through section should be performed for the conditional
transverse force Q f ic , taken as constant along the entire length of the rod and determined by the formula

Q f ic = 7.15·10 -6 (2330 - E / R y ) N / φ , (18)

where N is the longitudinal force in the through rod;

φ is the coefficient of stability under central compression (for a section of type B ), taken when calculating a through rod in the plane of the planks or
gratings.

The conditional transverse force Q f ic should be distributed:

if there are only connecting strips (lattices) - equally between the strips (lattices) lying in planes perpendicular to the axis relative to which the stability
check is performed;

in the presence of a solid sheet and connecting strips (lattices) - in half between the sheet and the strips (lattices) lying in planes parallel to the sheet;

when calculating equilateral triangular through rods - equal to 0.8 Q f ic for each system of connecting strips (lattices) located on one face.

7.2.8 The calculation of connecting strips and their attachments (see Figure 4 ) should be performed as the calculation of elements of braceless
trusses for the combined action of the force F s , shearing the strip, and the moment M s , bending the strip in its plane, the values ​of which should be
determined using the formulas:

Fs = Qslb/b; (19)

Ms = Qslb/2, (20)

where Q s is the conditional transverse force falling on the bar of one face.

7.2.9 The calculation of the elements of connecting lattices of composite rods should be performed as the calculation of the elements of lattices of flat
trusses. When calculating the diagonals of lattices according to Figure 3, the force in the diagonal should be determined by the formula

Nd = α1Qsd/b, (21)

where α 1 is a coefficient taken equal to: 1.0 for the lattice according to Figures 3 , a , b and 0.5 for Figure 3 , c ;

Q s is the conditional transverse force per plane of the lattice.

When calculating the diagonals of a cross lattice with spacers (Figure 3 , g ), one should take into account the additional force arising in each
diagonal from the compression of the branches and determined by the formula

(22)

where α 2 = dl b 2 /(2 b 3 + d 3 ) - b , l b , d are the dimensions shown in Figure 3 ;

N b - force in one branch of the rod;

A d , A b - cross-sectional area of ​one diagonal and one branch, respectively.

7.2.10 The calculation of rods intended to reduce the design length of compressed elements must be performed for a force equal to the conditional
transverse force in the main compressed element, determined by formula ( 18 ).

The calculation of spacers intended to reduce the calculated length of column branches in a plane perpendicular to the plane of the transverse
frames, in the presence of loads from overhead or overhead cranes, should be performed for a conditional transverse force determined by formula (
18 ), where the value of N should be taken as equal to the sum of the longitudinal forces in two column branches connected by a spacer.

7.3 Checking the stability of walls and flange sheets of centrally compressed solid
section elements
7.3.1 When checking the stability of the walls, the calculated height h ef should be taken from Figure 5:
 Figure 5 - Calculated dimensions of walls, shelf overhangs, belt sheets
in rolled, composite and bent sections

full wall height - in welded elements;

the distance between the edges of the belt corners closest to the element axis - in elements with friction belt connections;

distance between the beginnings of internal roundings - in rolled sections;

distance between the edges of the fillets - in bent profiles.

7.3.2 The stability of the walls of centrally compressed elements of a solid section should be considered ensured if the conditional flexibility of the wall
does not exceed the values ​of the ultimate conditional flexibility , determined using the formulas in Table 9. More
flexible walls should be used when their stability is confirmed (theoretically or experimentally).

Table 9

Cross-section Conditional flexibility of an element Limit conditional flexibility of the wall

≤2 1,30 + 0,15 (23)

>2 1,20 + 0,35 ≤ 2,3 (24)

≤1 1,2 (25)

>1 1,0 + 0,2 ≤ 1,6 (26)

≤ 0,8 1,0 (27)

> 08 0,85 + 0,19 ≤ 1,6 (28)

0,8 ≤ ≤4 (29)
 Designations adopted in Table 9:

- conditional flexibility of an element, taken in calculations of stability under central compression;

b f - width of the T-beam shelf.

Notes

1 In a box section, the value should be determined for plates located parallel to the plane in which the stability of the element as a whole is
checked.

2 In a T-section, the condition 1 ≤ b f / h ef ≤ 2 must be met; for < 0.8 or > 4 in formula (29), = 0.8 or = 4, respectively, must be taken.

3 The sign “≤” in the formulas means that the value, if exceeded, when calculated according to the formula should be taken as equal to that
indicated on the right side.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

7.3.3 Walls of centrally compressed elements of solid cross-section (columns, posts, supports, etc.) with ≥ 2.3, with the exception of those
designed taking into account the geometric nonlinearity of structures, should be reinforced with transverse stiffeners with a pitch of 2.5 h e f to 3 h e f .

In solid-wall branches of through-section columns, stiffening ribs should be installed only at the attachment points of the connecting gratings (strips).

In a wall reinforced only by transverse ribs, the width of their protruding part b r must be no less than ( h ef /30 + 40) mm - for a paired symmetrical rib,
no less than ( h ef /20 + 50) mm - for a single-sided rib; the thickness of the rib t r must be no less than .

When strengthening a wall with one-sided transverse stiffening ribs, single corners should be welded to the wall with a feather.

7.3.4 In centrally compressed I-section elements with a calculated wall height h e f in the case of strengthening the wall with a longitudinal stiffener
located in the middle and with a moment of inertia of the section I rl .

when , the value specified in 7.3.2 should be multiplied by the coefficient

(30)

When a rib is located on one side of a wall, its moment of inertia should be calculated relative to the axis coinciding with the nearest edge of the wall
and it should be no less than for a paired symmetrical rib.

In the case of a longitudinal rib being made in the form of a wall corrugation, the expanded length of the corrugation should be taken into account
when calculating h ef .

Longitudinal stiffeners should be included in the calculated sections of the elements.

The minimum dimensions of the protruding part of the longitudinal stiffeners should be taken as for the transverse ribs in accordance with the
requirements of 7.3.3 .

7.3.5 When calculating centrally and eccentrically compressed bars of solid cross-section in cases where the actual value of the conditional flexibility
of the wall exceeds (for central compression by no more than 2 times) the value of the ultimate conditional flexibility of
the wall obtained in accordance with the requirements of 7.3.2 , as well as 9.4.2 and 9.4.3 , in formulas ( 7 ), as well as ( 109 ), ( 111 ), ( 115 ), (
116 ), ( 120 ) and ( 121 ) the calculated reduced cross-sectional area is taken instead of A .

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

7.3.6 The value of A d should be calculated using the formulas:

for I-beams and channel sections

Ad = A - (hef - hd)tw, (31)

for box section:

under central compression

 Ad = A - 2(hef - hd)tw - 2(bef,1 - bd)tf; (32)

under eccentric compression

Ad = A - 2(hef - hd)tw, (33)

where h ef and h d are the calculated and reduced heights of the wall located parallel to the plane in which the stability is checked;

b ef , 1 and b d - the calculated and reduced width of the box section chord located perpendicular to the plane in which the stability is checked.

The value of h d in centrally compressed elements should be calculated using the formulas:

for I-section

(34)

where for > 3.5 it should be taken = 3.5;

for box section

(35)

where for > 2.3 it should be taken = 2.3;

for channel section

(36)

The values ​of and in formulas ( 34 ) - ( 36 ) for centrally compressed elements should be taken in accordance with the requirements of 7.3.2
. When calculating the value of b d for a box section using formula ( 35 ), instead of h d , t w , and , b d , t f , and , respectively, should be
taken , and the value should be determined in accordance with the requirements of 7.3.9 .

The value of h d for eccentrically compressed elements of I-sections and box-sections should be calculated using formulas ( 34 ) and ( 35 ),
respectively; in these formulas, the values ​and should be taken in accordance with 9.4.2 .

7.3.7 When checking the stability of the belt sheets, the calculated overhang width b ef should be taken as the distance:

from the edge of the wall to the edge of the belt sheet (shelf) - in welded elements;

from the axis of the outermost bolt in the belt to the edge of the belt sheet - in elements with friction belt connections;

from the beginning of the internal rounding to the edge of the shelf - in rolled profiles;

from the edge of the fillet to the edge of the shelf - in bent profiles (see Figure 5 ).

7.3.8 The stability of the chord sheets (shelves) of centrally compressed elements of solid section should be considered ensured if the conditional
flexibility of the chord (shelf) overhang does not exceed the values ​of the ultimate conditional flexibility of the chord (shelf)
overhang , determined by the formulas of Table 10, in which for values ​< 0.8 or > 4, it should be taken, respectively , = 0.8 or = 4.

Table 10

Cross-section Limit conditional flexibility of the overhang of the belt (shelf) with the conditional flexibility of the element
0.8 ≤ λ ≤ 4
 0,36 + 0,10 (37)

0,43 + 0,08 (38)

0,40 + 0,07 (39)

0,85 + 0,19 (40)

The designation adopted in Table 10:

- conditional flexibility of an element, taken in calculations of stability under central compression.

Note - For overhangs of a belt (shelf) bordered by ribs, the limit values ​of conditional flexibility calculated using formulas (37) and (38) should be
multiplied by a coefficient of 1.5, and using formula (39) - by 1.6.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

7.3.9 In centrally compressed box-section elements, the ultimate conditional flexibility of the chord sheet should be taken from Table 10 , as for
box-section walls: .

7.3.10 The height of the bend a ef of the chord (shelf) overhang according to Figure 5 or the height of the border rib, if any, must be at least 0.3 b ef in
elements not reinforced with strips, and 0.2 b ef in elements reinforced with strips (see Table 10). The thickness of the border rib must be at least 2 a
ef /E.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

7.3.11 When assigning sections of centrally compressed elements according to ultimate flexibility (in accordance with 10.4 ), the values ​of ultimate
conditional slenderness of the wall and chords ( ), determined according to Tables 9 and 10 , respectively, should be increased by
multiplying by the coefficient , but not more than by 1.25.

8 Calculation of steel structure elements during bending

8.1 General provisions for calculation

Depending on the purpose and operating conditions of the structures, the calculation of bending elements (beams) should be performed without
taking into account or taking into account plastic deformations in accordance with the division of elements into three classes according to 4.2.7 .

Beams of class 1 should be used for loads of all types and calculated within the limits of elastic deformations; beams of classes 2 and 3 should be
used for static loads and calculated taking into account the development of plastic deformations.

Crane runway beams for cranes of operating mode groups 1K - 8K according to SP 20.13330 should be classified as class 1 when calculating for
strength.

Bi-steel beams should be classified as class 2 and calculated taking into account limited plastic deformations in the wall, the values ​of which should
be determined upon reaching the design resistance R yf in belts made of stronger steel.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

8.2 Strength calculation of bending elements of solid cross-section

8.2.1 The strength calculation of class 1 beams should be performed using the following formulas:
when a moment acts in one of the principal planes

(41)

when a transverse force acts in the section

(42)

when moments act in two principal planes (and in the presence of a bimoment)

(43)

where x and y are the distances from the principal axes to the section point under consideration, and

ω is the sectorial coordinate of this point;

with the simultaneous action of a moment and a transverse force in the beam wall

(44)

where σ x = M x y / I xn is the normal stress in the middle plane of the wall, parallel to the longitudinal axis of the beam;

σ y - the same, perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the beam, including σ loc , determined by formula ( 47 );

τ xy = QS /( It w ) - shear stress in the wall.

The stresses σ x and σ y , taken in formula ( 44 ) with their signs, as well as τ xy should be determined at the same point of the beam wall.

When checking the strength for the action of a transverse force on a support for split beams, formula ( 42 ) should be used without taking into
account the work of the chords.

In beams calculated using formula ( 43 ), the stress values ​in the beam web must be checked using formula ( 44 ) in two principal bending planes.

When weakening the wall with holes for bolts, the left part of formula ( 42 ), as well as the value of τ xy in formula ( 44 ), should be multiplied by the
coefficient a , determined by the formula

a = s/(s - d), (45)

where s is the pitch of the holes in one vertical row;

d - hole diameter.

8.2.2 The strength calculation of a beam wall not reinforced with stiffeners, under the action of local stress σ loc at the points of application of the load
to the upper chord, as well as in the support sections of the beam, should be performed according to the formula

(46)

Where

σ loc = F / ( left w ) . (47)

Here F is the calculated value of the load (force);

l ef - the conditional length of the load distribution, determined by the formulas:

for the cases in Figure 6 , a ) and b )

l ef = b + 2 h ; (48)

for the case according to Figure 6 , in

(49)

a) - welded beam; b) - rolled beam; c) - welded or rolled beam under load from crane wheel

Figure 6 - Schemes of distribution of concentrated load on the beam wall

where h is the dimension equal to the sum of the thickness of the upper chord of the beam and the leg of the chord seam, if the lower beam is welded
(see Figure 6 , a ), or the distance from the outer edge of the flange to the beginning of the inner rounding of the wall, if the lower beam is rolled (see
Figure 6 , b );

ψ is a coefficient taken equal to: 3.25 for welded and rolled beams; 4.5 for beams with friction belt connections;

I 1f - the sum of the proper moments of inertia of the beam flange and the crane rail or the moment of inertia of the section consisting of the flange
and the rail in the case of welding the rail with seams that ensure the joint operation of the flange and the rail;

b - width of support of the upper element.

8.2.3 The strength calculation of 2nd and 3rd class split beams of I-beam and box sections (Figure 7 ) made of steel with a standard resistance R yn ≤
440 N/mm 2, subject to the requirements of 8.4.6 , 8.5.8 , 8.5.9 and 8.5.18 and with shear stresses τ x = Q x / A w ≤ 0.9 R s (except for support
sections), should be performed using the formulas:

Figure 7 - Diagrams of I-beam (a) and box-shaped (b) beam sections

with forces acting on them

when bending in the plane of greatest rigidity ( I x > I y )

(50)

under bending in two principal planes and stresses τ y = Q y /(2 A f ) ≤ 0.5 R s

 (51)

Here M x , M y are the absolute values ​of bending moments;

c x , c y - coefficients taken from Table E.1 ;

β is a coefficient taken equal to:

at τх ≤ 0,5Rs β = 1;

at 0,5Rs < τх ≤ 0,9Rs (52)

where a f = A f / A w is the ratio of the sectional area of ​the belt to the sectional area of ​the wall (for an asymmetric section, A f is the area of ​the
smaller belt; for a box section, A w is the total sectional area of ​the two walls).

when bending in the plane of greatest rigidity ( I x > I y ) and constrained torsion of symmetrical I-beams

(53)

where c ω is determined by linear interpolation according to Table 10a:

Table 10a

0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 0,99

c oh 1,470 1,636 1,845 2,054 2,263 2,472 2,681 2,890 3,099 3,308 3,496

When calculating the cross-section in the pure bending zone in formulas ( 50 ) and ( 51 ), β = 1 should be taken and instead of the coefficients c x
and c y , respectively

c xm = 0.5(1 + c x ); c ym = 0.5(1 + c y ).

The strength calculation in the support section of beams (with M x = 0 and M y = 0) should be performed using the formulas:

(54)

(55)

When weakening the wall with holes for bolts, the left part of formulas ( 54 ) and ( 55 ) should be multiplied by the coefficient α , determined by
formula ( 45 ).

To establish the dimensions of the minimum sections of composite beams, the coefficients c x and c y should be taken as less than the values ​given
in Table E.1 , but not less than 1.0. The method for selecting the minimum sections of bending elements is given in the rules for the design of steel
structures.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

8.2.4 The strength calculation of split beams of variable cross-section in accordance with 8.2.3 taking into account plastic deformations is performed
only in one section with the most unfavourable combination of forces M and Q ; in the remaining sections of the beam, the calculation should be
performed with values ​of the coefficients c x and c y less than those in Table E.1 (Appendix E), or in accordance with 8.2.1 .
8.2.5 The strength calculation of continuous and clamped beams of constant I- and box-sections with two axes of symmetry, bent in the plane of
greatest rigidity, with adjacent spans differing by no more than 20%, subject to the requirements of 8.4.6 , 8.5.8 , 8.5.9 and 8.5.18, should be
performed using formula ( 50 ) as a calculation of class 2 elements taking into account the partial redistribution of support and span moments.

In this case, the calculated value of the moment should be determined using the formula

М = 0.5( M max + M ef ), (56)

where M max is the greatest bending moment in a span or at a support, determined from the calculation of a continuous beam under the assumption
of elastic work of steel;

M ef - conditional bending moment, equal to;

a) in continuous beams with hinged ends, the greater of the values:

(57)

M e f = 0.5 M 2 , (58)

where the symbol max means that the maximum of the entire expression following it should be found;

M 1 - bending moment in the extreme span, calculated as in a hinged single-span beam;

α is the distance from the section in which the moment M 1 acts to the extreme support;

l - length of the extreme span;

M 2 - maximum bending moment in the intermediate span, calculated as in a hinged single-span beam;

b) in single-span and continuous beams with clamped ends M e f = 0.5 M 3 , where M 3 is the largest of the moments calculated as in beams with
hinges on supports;

c) in a beam with one clamped end and the other freely supported, the value of M e f should be determined using formula ( 57 ).

The value of τ x in formula ( 52 ) should be calculated in the section where M max acts ; if M max is the moment in the span, the support section of the
beam should be checked.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

8.2.6 The strength calculation of continuous and clamped beams that satisfy 8.2.5 , in the case of bending in two principal planes, should be
performed according to formula ( 51 ), taking into account the redistribution of support and span moments in two principal planes in accordance with
8.2.5 .

8.2.7 The strength calculation of continuous and clamped beams that meet the requirements of 8.2.5 , 8.4.6 , 8.5.8 , 8.5.9 and 8.5.18 should be
performed using formula ( 50 ) as a calculation of class 3 elements, taking into account the redistribution of bending moments and the formation of
conditional plastic hinges, as well as the influence of shear stresses τ x in accordance with 8.2.3 in sections with maximum bending moment.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

8.2.8 The strength calculation of bi-steel split beams of I- and box-sections with two axes of symmetry, subject to the requirements of 8.4.4 , 8.5.9
and 8.5.17 and with shear stresses τ x ≤ 0.9 R s and τ y ≤ 0.5 R s (except for support sections), should be performed as a calculation of class 2
elements using the formulas:

when bending in one principal plane

(59)

when bending in two principal planes (59)

 (60)

In formulas ( 59 ) and ( 60 ):

cxr = (αfr + 0,25 - 0,0833/r2)/(αf + 0,167), (61)

где α f = A f / A w ; r = R yf / R is ;

β r is a coefficient taken equal to:

at τх ≤ 0,5Rs βr = 1 ;

at 0,5Rs < τх < 0,9Rs (62)

c yr is a coefficient taken equal to 1.15 for an I-section and 1.05/ r for a box section.

The calculation of bisteel beams in the presence of a pure bending zone and in the support section, as well as taking into account the weakening of
the section, should be carried out in accordance with 8.2.3 and the rules for the design of steel structures.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

8.3 Strength calculation of solid section crane track beams

8.3.1 The strength calculation of crane track beams should be performed in accordance with 8.2.1 for the action of vertical and horizontal loads
determined according to SP 20.13330 .

8.3.2 The strength calculation of the walls of crane runway beams (except for beams for cranes of operating mode groups 7K in metallurgical
production shops and 8K) should be performed using formula ( 44 ), in which, when calculating the cross-sections on the supports of continuous
beams, instead of the coefficient 0.87, the coefficient 0.77 should be used.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

8.3.3 When calculating the strength of the walls of crane track beams made of steel with a yield strength of no more than 440 N/mm2 for cranes of
operating mode groups 7K (in metallurgical production shops) and 8K, the following conditions must be met:

(63)

(σx + σloc,x)/Ry ≤ 1; (64)

( σ loc,y + σ fy )/ R y ≤ 1; (65)

(τxy + τloc,xy + τf,xy)/Ry ≤ 1, (66)

where β is a coefficient taken equal to 0.87 for calculating split beams and 0.77 for calculating sections on supports of continuous beams;

σ x = M / W xn ; σ location,x = 0.25 σ location,y ; σ loc,y = γ f γ f1 F n /( tl ef ); σfy = Mtta/(0,75Ifhw); (67)

τxy = Q/(th); τ location,x = 0.3 σ location,y ; τf,xy = 0,25σfy.

In formulas ( 67 ):
M and Q are the bending moment and shear force in the beam section, respectively, from the design load determined in accordance with SP
20.13330 ;

γ f - load safety factor for crane loads, adopted in accordance with SP 20.13330 ;

γ f 1 - coefficient of increase of concentrated vertical load from one crane wheel, adopted in accordance with the additional coefficient according to SP
20.13330 ;

F n - full standard value of concentrated vertical load from one crane wheel;

l ef - conventional length determined in accordance with 8.2.2 ;

a - distance between vertical ribs of the beam wall;

M t - local torque, determined by the formula

M t = γ f γ f1 F n e + 0.75 Q t h r , (68)

where e = 0.2 b , (here b is the width of the rail base);

Q t - calculated horizontal load directed across the crane track, caused by distortions of overhead cranes and non-parallelism of crane tracks and
accepted in accordance with SP 20.13330 ;

h r - height of crane rail;

I f = I t + b f t f 3 /3 is the sum of the proper moments of inertia during torsion of the rail and the chord, where b f and t f are the width and thickness of
the upper chord of the beam, respectively.

All stresses in formulas ( 63 ) - ( 67 ) should be taken with a plus sign.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

8.3.4 The strength calculation of overhead beams of crane tracks (monorails) should be performed taking into account local normal stresses from the
pressure of the crane wheel, directed along and across the beam axis.

8.3.5 The strength calculation of bi-steel beams of I-section crane runways with two axes of symmetry for cranes of operating mode groups 1 K - 5 K
at r = R yf / R yw ≤ 1.5 should be performed in accordance with the requirements of 8.3.2 or according to formula ( 60 ), in which:

M y is the bending moment in the horizontal plane, completely transmitted to the upper chord of the beam;

W xn = W xn f - moment of resistance of the section of the upper belt relative to the y - y axis ;

with y - a coefficient taken equal to 1.15.

8.4 Calculation of the overall stability of bending elements of solid cross-section

8.4.1 The stability calculation of class 1 I-beams, as well as class 2 bi-steel beams that meet the requirements of 8.2.1 and 8.2.8 , should be
performed using the formulas:

when bending in the plane of the wall, coinciding with the plane of symmetry of the section

(69)

when bending in two principal planes (and the presence of bimoments)

(70)

In formulas ( 69 ) and ( 70 ):

φ b is the coefficient of stability in bending, determined according to Appendix G for beams with support sections secured against lateral
displacements and rotation;

W cx is the section modulus relative to the x - x axis , calculated for the most compressed fiber;
W cy is the section modulus relative to the y - y axis , coinciding with the bending plane, calculated for the most compressed fiber;

W cω is the sectorial moment of resistance of the section, calculated for the most compressed fiber.

The “+” sign at the second and third terms in formula ( 70 ) is accepted if at the point under consideration the corresponding force causes
compression.

For bisteel beams in formulas ( 69 ) and ( 70 ), as well as when determining φ b , R y should be replaced by R y f .

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

8.4.2 When determining the value of φ b, the distance between the points of fastening of the compressed chord from transverse displacements
(nodes of longitudinal or transverse ties, points of fastening of rigid flooring) should be taken as the design length of the beam l ef ; in the absence of
ties l ef = l (where l is the span of the beam); the design length of the console should be taken as: 4/= I in the absence of fastening of the compressed
chord at the end of the console in the horizontal plane (here l is the length of the console) or the distance between the points of fastening of the
compressed chord in the horizontal plane - when the chord is fastened at the end and along the length of the console.

8.4.3 The stability calculation of I-section crane runway beams should be performed using formula ( 70 ), in which: М y is the bending moment in the
horizontal plane, completely transmitted to the upper chord of the beam; W y = W y f is the moment of resistance of the upper chord section relative to
the y - y axis .

8.4.4 The stability of class 1 beams, as well as class 2 bisteel beams, should be considered ensured:

a) when transferring the load to the beam through a continuous rigid deck (reinforced concrete staffs made of heavy, light and cellular concrete, flat
and profiled metal decking, corrugated steel, etc.), continuously supported by the compressed flange of the beam and connected to it by welding,
bolts, self-tapping screws, etc.; in this case, friction forces should not be taken into account;

b) with values ​of the conditional flexibility of the compressed chord of the beam not exceeding its limit values ,
determined by the formulas of Table 11 for beams of symmetrical I-section or asymmetrical - with a more developed compressed chord, calculated by
formula ( 69 ) and having a ratio of the width of the stretched chord to the width of the compressed chord of at least 0.75.

Table 11

Load application point Conditional ultimate flexibility of a compressed belt of a rolled

or welded beam

To the upper belt 0,35 + 0,0032b/t + (0,76 - 0,02b/t)b/h (71)

To the lower belt 0,57 + 0,0032b/t + (0,92 - 0,02b/t)b/h (72)

Regardless of the level of load application when calculating the beam section 0,41 + 0,0032b/t + (0,73 - 0,016b/t)b/h (73)
between ties or in pure bending

Designations adopted in Table 11:

b and t are the width and thickness of the compressed belt, respectively;

h - distance (height) between the axes of the belt sheets.

Notes

1 The values ​are determined for 1 ≤ h/b ≤ 6 and 15 ≤ b/t ≤ 35; for beams with a ratio b/t < 15 in the formulas of Table 11, b/t = 15 should be taken .

2 For beams with friction chord connections, values ​should be multiplied by 1.2.

3 The values ​should be increased by multiplying by the coefficient , where σ = M /( W c γ c ).

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

8.4.5 Attachments to the compression chord of rigid decking, longitudinal or transverse ties, which must ensure the stability of the bending element,
should be calculated for the actual or conditional transverse force. In this case, the conditional transverse force should be determined:

when fixing the beam at individual points - according to formula ( 18 ), in which φ should be determined for a section of type b (see Table 7 ) with
flexibility λ = l ef / i (where i is the radius of gyration of the section of the compressed belt in the horizontal plane), and N - calculated according to the
formula
 N = ( А f r + 0,25 A w ) R is , (74)

where A f and A w are the cross-sectional areas of the compressed belt and wall, respectively;

r = R y f / R is ≥ 1,0;

R yf and R yw are the calculated resistances of the steel of the compressed belt and the wall, respectively;

with continuous fastening - according to the formula

qfic = 3Qfic/l, (75)

where q fic is the conventional transverse force per unit length of the beam flange;

Q fic is the conditional transverse force determined by formula ( 18 ), in which φ = 1, and N should be calculated by formula ( 74 ).

8.4.6 The stability of beams of the 2nd and 3rd classes should be considered ensured if the requirements of list a) or b) of 8.4.4 are met , provided
that the values ​, determined using the formulas in Table 11 , are multiplied by the coefficient

δ = 1 - 0.6( c 1 x - 1)/( c x - 1), (76)

where c 1 x is the coefficient determined by the larger value from the formulas:

c 1 x = M x /( W xn R y γ c ) or c 1 x = βc x (77)

and changing within the range 1 < c 1 x ≤ c x .

Here M x is the bending moment in the section;

β is a coefficient taken according to formula ( 52 );

c x - coefficient taken according to table E.1 .

In this case, the values ​of the conditional ultimate flexibility of the beam flange are taken as:

δ - on the section of the beam length where plastic deformations are taken into account;

- in sections of the beam length with stresses in sections σ = M / W n, min ≤ R y γ c .

Plastic deformations are taken into account when calculating beams with a compressed flange that is less developed than the tensioned flange, only
if the requirements of item a) 8.4.4 are met .

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

8.5 Checking the stability of walls and flange sheets of solid section bending elements
8.5.1 The stability of the walls of class 1 beams should be considered ensured if the requirements of 8.2.1 , 8.3.1 - 8.3.3 , 8.4.1 - 8.4.5 are met and
the conditional flexibility of the wall (Figure 5 ) does not exceed the values :

3.5 - in the absence of local stress ( σ loc = 0) in beams with double-sided flange seams;

3.2 - the same, in beams with one-sided belt seams;

2.5 - in the presence of local stress σ loc in beams with double-sided flange seams.

In this case, transverse (and supporting) stiffening ribs should be installed in accordance with 8.5.9 or 8.5.11 and 8.5.12 .

8.5.2 The stability check of the walls of class 1 beams should be performed taking into account the greatest compressive stress σ at the calculated
boundary of the wall, taken with the plus sign, the average shear stress τ and the local stress σ loc in the wall under a concentrated load.

The stresses σ and τ should be calculated using the formulas:

 σ = My / I x ; (78)

τ = Q /( t w h w ), (79)

where M and Q are the average values ​of the bending moment and the shear force, respectively, within the compartment; if the length of the
compartment a (the distance between the axes of the transverse stiffeners) is greater than its design height h e f , then the values ​of M and Q should
be calculated as averages for a more stressed section with a length equal to h ef ; if within the compartment the moment or shear force changes sign,
then their average values ​should be calculated on the section of the compartment with one sign;

h ef - calculated wall height, taken according to 7.3.1 ;

h w - full height of the wall.

The local stress σ loc ( σ loc , y ) in the wall under a concentrated load should be determined according to 8.2.2 and 8.3.3 .

In beam sections where a concentrated load is applied to a tension chord, only σ and τ or σ loc and τ must be taken into account simultaneously .

8.5.3 The stability of the walls of class 1 beams of symmetrical cross-section, reinforced only by transverse stiffeners (Figure 8 ), in the presence of
local stress ( σ loc ≠ 0) and with conditional flexibility of the wall should be considered ensured if the condition is met

(80)

σ , σ loc , τ - stresses determined according to the requirements of 8.5.2 ;

σ cr - critical stress, calculated by the formula

(81)

where c cr is the coefficient determined in accordance with 8.5.4 - 8.5.6 ;

σ loc, cr - critical stress, calculated by the formula

(82)

where c 1 and c 2 are coefficients determined according to 8.5.5 ;

τ cr - critical stress, calculated by the formula

(83)

here μ is the ratio of the larger side of the wall section to the smaller one;

; d is the smaller of the sides of the wall compartment ( h ef or a ).

a) - when applying a concentrated load to a compressed belt; b) - the same, to a stretched belt

Figure 8 - Diagram of a beam section reinforced with transverse stiffeners

8.5.4 For beams according to 8.5.3 with σ loc = 0, the coefficient c cr in formula ( 81 ) should be determined according to Table 12 depending on the
type of chord connections and the value of the coefficient δ , calculated according to the formula

δ = β ( b f / h ef )/( t f / t w ) 3 , (84)

where β is the coefficient taken from Table 13 ;

b f , t f are the width and thickness of the compressed beam chord, respectively.

Table 12

Belt connections of beams The value of c cr for δ equal to

≤ 0,8 1,0 2,0 4,0 6,0 10,0 ≥ 30,0

Welded 30,0 31,5 33,3 34,6 34,8 35,1 35,5

Friction 35,2

Table 1 3

Yes, yes. Working conditions of the compressed belt b

Crane tracks The crane rails are not welded 2,0

The crane rails are welded ∞

Others With continuous support of the slabs ∞

In other cases 0,8

Note - For sections of crane track beams, where a concentrated load is applied to a stretched chord, when calculating the coefficient δ, β = 0.8
should be taken .

8.5.5 When calculating the values ​of σ loc , cr according to formula ( 82 ) for σ loc ≠ 0, the following should be taken:

c 1 - according to table 14 depending on the ratio a / h e f and the value ρ = 1.04 l ef / h ef (here the value of l ef should be determined according to the
requirements of 8.2.2 );

c 2 - according to Table 15, depending on the ratio a / h e f and the value of δ , calculated using formula ( 84 ); for beams with friction belt connections,
δ = 10 should be taken .

For σ loc ≠ 0, the wall check according to formula ( 80 ) should be performed depending on the value of a / h e f :

a) for a ratio of a / h e f ≤ 0.8, the value of σ cr should be determined using formula ( 81 ), taking into account 8.5.4 .

If a concentrated load is applied to a stretched belt (Figure 8 , b), then when checking the wall taking into account only σ loc and τ when determining
the coefficient δ according to formula ( 84 ) , the width and thickness of the stretched belt should be taken as b f and t f , respectively.

Table 1 4

r Values ​of c 1 at a / h ef ( a 1 / h ef ) equal to

0,50 0,60 0,67 0,80 1,0 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 >2,0
 0,10 56,7 46,6 41,8 34,9 28.5 24,5 21,7 19,5 17,7 16,2

0,15 38,9 31,3 27,9 23,0 18,6 16,2 14,6 13,6 12,7 12,0

0,20 33,9 26,7 23,5 19,2 15,4 13,3 12,1 11,3 10,7 10,2

0,25 30,6 24,9 20,3 16,2 12,9 11,1 10,0 9,4 9,0 8,7

0,30 28,9 21,6 18,5 14,5 11,3 9,6 8,7 8,1 7,8 7,6

0,35 28,0 20,6 17,4 13,4 10,2 8,6 7,7 7,2 6,9 6,7

0,40 27,4 20,0 16,8 12,7 9,5 7,9 7,0 6,6 6,3 6,1

Table 1 5

d The values ​of the coefficient c 1 for a / h ef ( a 1 / h ef ) equal to

0,50 0,60 0,67 0,80 1,00 1,20 1,40 ≥ 1,60

≤1 1,56 1,56 1,56 1,56 1,56 1,56 1,56 1,56

2 1,64 1,64 1,64 1,67 1,76 1,82 1,84 1,85

4 1,66 1,67 1,69 1,75 1,88 2,01 2,09 2,12

6 1,67 1,68 1,70 1,77 1,92 2,08 2,19 2,26

10 1,68 1,69 1,71 1,78 1,96 2,14 2,28 2,38

≥ 30 1,68 1,70 1,72 1,80 1,99 2,20 2,38 2,52

b) for the ratio a / h ef > 0.8, the check using formula ( 80 ) should be performed twice: for the value of σ cr calculated using formula ( 81 ) taking into
account 8.5.4 , and for a value of σ loc,cr using formula ( 82 ) when, when determining the coefficients c 1 and c 2 , instead of the size a, a 1 = 0.5 a is
adopted for 0.8 ≤ a / h ef ≤ 1.33 or a 1 = 0.67 h ef for a / h ef > 1.33; for the values ​of σ cr and σ loc,cr calculated for the actual value of a / h ef (if a / h ef
> 2, a / h ef = 2 should be adopted in the calculation ); in this case, the coefficient σ cr in formula ( 81 ) should be determined using Table 16.

Table 16

The value of c cr at a / h ef or a/(2 h c ) equal to

≤ 0,8 0,9 1,0 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 ≥ 2,0

According to table 12 37,0 39,2 45,2 52,8 62,0 72,6 84,7

The value of τ cr in all cases should be calculated based on the actual dimensions of the compartment.

8.5.6 The stability of the walls of class 1 beams of an asymmetric I-section with a more developed compressed chord, reinforced only by transverse
stiffeners, should be considered ensured if condition ( 80 ) is met taking into account the following changes:

when calculating the values ​of σ cr using formulas ( 81 ) and ( 84 ), instead of the value h e f , the doubled height of the compressed zone of the wall 2
h c is adopted ;
for a / h ef > 0.8 and σ loc ≠ 0, two checks given in 8.5.5 are performed, in which, when determining σ cr according to Table 16 and σ cr according to
formula ( 81 ), instead of the value h e f , the doubled height of the compressed zone of the wall 2 h c is adopted .

The values ​of τ cr and σ loc,cr should be determined based on the actual dimensions of the wall compartment.

8.5.7 The stability of the walls of class 1 beams of an asymmetric I-section with a more developed tensile chord, reinforced only by transverse
stiffeners, under the simultaneous action of stresses σ and τ and the absence of stresses σ loc should be considered ensured if the condition is met

(85)

where a = ( σ 1 - σ 2 )/ σ 1 ; β = ( σ cr / σ 1 )( τ / τ cr ); σ cr - by formula ( 81 ).

Here σ 1 and σ 2 are the compressive and tensile stresses at the calculated boundaries of the wall, taken with the plus and minus signs, respectively,
and determined by formula ( 78 );

τ and τ cr are the shear stresses determined by formulas ( 79 ) and ( 83 ), respectively;

c cr is a coefficient determined according to Table 17 depending on a .

Table 1 7

a 1,0 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2,0

ccr 10,2 12,7 15,5 20,0 25,0 30,0

8.5.8 The stability of the walls of beams of the 2nd and 3rd classes made of homogeneous steel and bisteel in the absence of local stress ( σ loc = 0)
and in compliance with the requirements of 7.3.1 , 8.2.3 and 8.2.8 should be considered ensured if the following conditions are met:

a) for beams of doubly symmetric I-beam and box-section

M /[ R yf γ c h ef 2 t w ( rα f + α )] ≤ 1, (86)

where α is the coefficient determined according to Table 18 (for τ = Q / A w and according to 8.5.1 );

Table 1 8

τ/Rsw The values ​of α for , equal to

2,2 2,5 3,0 3,5 4,0 4,5 5,0 5,5

0 0,240 0,239 0,235 0,226 0,213 0,195 0,173 0,153

0,5 0,203 0,202 0,197 0,189 0,176 0,158 0,136 0,116

0,6 0,186 0,185 0,181 0,172 0,159 0,141 0,119 0,099

0,7 0,167 0,166 0,162 0,152 0,140 0,122 0,100 0,080

0,8 0,144 0,143 0,139 0,130 0,117 0,099 0,077 0,057

0,9 0,119 0,118 0,114 0,105 0,092 0,074 0,052 0,032

r - should be determined according to 8.4.5 ;

b) for asymmetric I-section beams with a more developed compressed chord, reinforced only by transverse ribs,
 (87)

where σ 1 , σ 2 are the stresses in the compressed and stretched belts, respectively; if σ 1 ≥ R yf or σ 2 ≥ R yf , then σ 1 = R yf or σ 2 = R yf should be
taken, respectively .

In expression ( 87 ), the height of the compressed zone of the wall h 1 should be determined by the formula

(88)

The values ​of M and Q should be calculated in one beam section.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

8.5.9 The beam walls should be reinforced with transverse stiffening ribs:

in class 1 beams, if the value of the conditional flexibility of the wall exceeds 3.2 - in the absence of a moving load on the beam flange or 2.2 - in
the presence of such a load;

in beams of the 2nd and 3rd classes - for any values ​of the conditional flexibility of the wall in sections of the beam length where plastic deformations
are taken into account, and in other sections - as in beams of the 1st class.

The distance between the transverse ribs must not exceed 2 h ef for ≥ 3.2 and 2.5 h ef for < 3.2.

For class 1 beams, these distances should be increased to a value of 3 h ef provided that the stability of the beam and the web is ensured by fulfilling
the requirements of listing a) or b) of 8.4.4 , if it does not exceed the values ​determined by formula ( 71 ).

Transverse stiffeners should be installed at the points where fixed concentrated loads are applied and on beam supports.

The absence of transverse stiffeners must be justified by calculation according to 8.2.2 .

In a wall reinforced only by transverse ribs, the width of their protruding part b r must be no less than ( h w /30 + 25) mm for a paired rib, no less than (
h w /24 + 40) mm for a single-sided rib; the thickness of the rib t r must be no less than 2 b r .

When strengthening a wall with one-sided transverse stiffening ribs made of single angles welded to the wall with a feather, the moment of inertia of
such a rib, calculated relative to the axis coinciding with the wall face closest to the rib, must be no less than for a paired rib.

8.5.10 The transverse stiffener located at the point of application of a concentrated load to the upper chord should be checked by stability calculation:
a two-sided stiffener - as a centrally compressed rack, and a one-sided stiffener - as a rack compressed with an eccentricity equal to the distance
from the median plane of the wall to the center of gravity of the design section of the rack. In this case, the design section of the rack must include the
section of the stiffener and a strip of the wall with a width of 0.65 t w on each side of the stiffener, and the design length of the rack should be
taken equal to the design height of the wall h e f .

8.5.11 The walls of class 1 beams, for which stability is not ensured under the action of normal stresses σ from bending, as well as at values ​of the
conditional flexibility of the wall (where σ is the stress in the compressed flange of the beam), should be reinforced with a
longitudinal stiffener installed in addition to the transverse ribs.

8.5.12 In the web of a symmetrical I-section beam of class 1, reinforced, in addition to transverse ribs, by one pair of longitudinal stiffening ribs
located at a distance h 1 from the boundary of the compressed compartment (Figure 9), both plates into which this rib divides the compartment
should be calculated separately:
 a) - beam with compressed upper chord; b) - beam with stretched upper chord

Figure 9 - Diagram of a beam reinforced with transverse (3) and longitudinal (4) stiffeners

a) plate 1, located between the compressed belt and the longitudinal rib, according to the formula

(89)

here the values ​of σ , σ loc , τ should be determined according to the requirements of 8.5.2 , and the values ​of σ cr ,1 and σ loc, cr ,1 - according to the
formulas:

at σloc = 0

(90)

Where ;

for σ loc ≠ 0 and μ 1 = a / h 1 ≤ 2 (for μ 1 > 2, μ 1 = 2 should be taken )

(91)

(92)

where ѱ = ( μ 1 + 1/ μ 1 ) 2 i (93)

τ cr ,1 - critical stress, which should be determined using formula ( 83 ) by substituting the dimensions of the plate being tested into it;

b) plate 2, located between the longitudinal rib and the stretched belt, - according to the formula

(94)

where σ and τ are stresses determined according to 8.5.2 ;

 (95)

at (96)

σ loc ,2 - stress, depending on which belt the load is applied to: to the compressed belt (see Figure 9 , a) it is taken to be equal to 0.4 σ loc (here σ loc
should be determined according to 8.5.2 ); to the stretched belt (see Figure 9 , b) - σ loc ,2 = σ loc ;

σ loc , cr 2 - stress determined by formula ( 82 ), where c 1 and c 2 should be determined respectively from Table 14 for ρ = 0.4 and from Table 15 for δ
= 1, replacing the value of h e f with the value of ( h e f - h 1 );

τ cr ,2 - stress determined by formula ( 83 ) with the dimensions of the plate being tested substituted into it.

8.5.13 The intermediate ribs located on plate 1 between the compressed belt and the longitudinal rib should be extended to the longitudinal rib
(Figure 10 ).

In this case, the calculation of plate 1 should be performed according to formulas ( 89 ) - ( 93 ), in which the value of a should be replaced by the
value of a 1 , where a 1 is the distance between the axes of adjacent intermediate ribs (see Figure 10). The calculation of plate 2 should be performed
according to 8.5.12 b).

Figure 10 - Diagram of a beam reinforced with transverse (3), longitudinal (4) and intermediate ( 5 ) stiffeners

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

8.5.14 The stability check of the beam walls of an asymmetric section (with a more developed compressed chord), reinforced with transverse ribs and
a paired longitudinal rib located in the compressed zone, should be performed using formulas ( 89 ) and ( 90 ); in this case, in formulas ( 90 ), ( 91 )
and ( 94 ), the ratios h 1 / h e f should be replaced by , and in formula ( 95 ), (0.5 - h 1 / h e f ) should be replaced by [ σ 1 /( σ 1 - σ 2 ) - h 1 /

h e f ], where σ 2 is the edge tensile stress (with a minus sign) at the calculated boundary of the compartment.

8.5.15 When strengthening a wall with transverse ribs and a paired longitudinal stiffener, the locations and moments of inertia of the sections of these
ribs must satisfy the requirements of 8.5.9 and the formulas of Table 19.

Table 19

Moment of inertia of the rib

transverse ( I r ) longitudinal ( I rl )

required ultimate

minimal maximum

0,20 ≥ 3heftw3 (2.5 - 0.5 a / h ef ) a 2 t w 3 / h ef 1,5heftw3 7 h ef t w 3

0,25 (1.5 - 0.4 a / h if ) a 2 t w 3 / h if 1,5heftw3 8,5heftw3

0,30 1,5heftw3 - -
 Note - When calculating I rl, intermediate values ​h 1 / h ef should be determined by linear interpolation.

When longitudinal and transverse stiffeners are located on one side of the wall, the moments of inertia of the sections of each of them should be
calculated relative to the axis coinciding with the wall face closest to the rib.

8.5.16 For values ​of conditional flexibility, the beam webs of a symmetrical I-section are designed as class 2 beams with flexible
(unstable) webs in accordance with the design rules for steel structures.

8.5.17 The section of the beam web above the support should be designed for stability under central compression from the plane of the beam as a
column loaded with a support reaction.

When strengthening the beam wall with support stiffeners with a protruding part width b r ( b r not less than 0.5 b fi , here b fi is the width of the lower
chord of the beam), the section of the support ribs and a wall strip with a width of no more than 0.65 on each side of the rib should be included in the
calculated cross-section of this rack .

The thickness of the supporting stiffener t r must be at least 3 b r , where b r is the width of the protruding part.

The calculated length of the rack should be taken equal to the calculated height of the beam wall h ef .

The lower ends of the support ribs (Figure 11 ) must be planed or tightly fitted or welded to the lower chord of the beam. The stresses in these
sections under the action of the support reaction must not exceed the design resistance of the steel: in the first case (see Figure 11 , a) - crushing R p
at a ≤ 1.5 t and compression R y at a > 1.5 t ; in the second case (see Figure 11 , b) - crushing R p .

a) - at the end using gouging; b) - remote from the end

with tight fitting or welding to the lower belt

Figure 11 - Schematic diagram of the support stiffener

Welds attaching the support rib to the bottom chord of the beam should be designed to withstand the support reaction.

In the absence of supporting stiffeners (in rolled beams), the calculated cross-section of the rack is a strip of wall with a width equal to the length of
the beam support section.

8.5.18 The stability of compressed chords should be considered ensured if the conditional flexibility of the chord overhang
or chord sheet of class 1 beams, as well as class 2 bisteel beams, when meeting the requirements of 7.3.7 , 8.2.1 and
8.2.8 , does not exceed the limit values ​determined by the formulas:

for shelf overhang (without edging and bending) of I-section

(97)

for box section belt sheet

(98)

Here σ c is the stress in the compressed belt, determined by the formulas:

for a uniform cross-section

σc = M/(Wxncγc) или σc = Mx/(Wxncγc) + My/(Wxnγc);

for bisteal section

where α ' are the values ​of α from Table 18 at τ = 0;

if σ с > R yf , then we should take σ с = R yf .

8.5.19 The stability of compressed chords should be considered ensured if the conditional flexibility of the overhang of the compressed chord or the
chord sheet of beams of the 2nd and 3rd classes made of homogeneous steel, when meeting the requirements of 7.3.7 , 8.2.3 and 8.5.8, does not
exceed the limit values ​determined at 2.2 ≤ ≤ 5.5 using the formulas:

for shelf overhang (without edging and bending) of I-section

(99)

for box section belt sheet

(100)

If < 2.2 or > 5.5, then = 2.2 or = 5.5 should be taken.

8.5.20 In the case of edging or bending of a shelf (wall) of a section (Figure 5 ), with a size a e f ≥ 0.3 b e f and a thickness , the
values ​determined by formulas ( 97 ) and ( 99 ) are increased by 1.5 times.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

8.6 Calculation of support plates

8.6.1 The area of ​the steel support plate must meet the requirements for calculating the strength of the foundation.

The transfer of the calculated force to the support plate can be carried out through the milled end or through the welded seams of the structure
resting on the plate.

8.6.2 The thickness of the support plate should be determined by calculating the bending of the plate using the formula

(101)

where M max is the largest of the bending moments M acting on a strip of unit width of different sections of the support plate and determined by the
formulas:

for the console section of the slab

M1 = 0,5qc2; (102)

for a section of a slab supported on four sides in the direction of the short and long sides, respectively

M a = α 1 qa 2 ; M в = α 2 qa 2 ; (103)

for a section of a slab supported on three sides

M3 = α3q(d1)2, (104)

for a section of a slab supported by two sides converging at an angle, according to formula ( 104 ), taking d 1 to be the diagonal of the rectangle, and
the size α 1 in Table E.2 to be the distance from the vertex of the angle to the diagonal.

Here c is the overhang of the cantilever section of the slab;

α 1 , α 2 , α 3 - coefficients depending on the support conditions and the ratio of the dimensions of the sides of the slab section and taken in
accordance with Table E.2 (Appendix E);

q is the reactive resistance of the foundation under the considered section of the slab per unit area of ​the slab.

9 Calculation of elements of steel structures under the action of longitudinal force with
bending

9.1 Strength calculation of solid section elements

9.1.1 The strength calculation of eccentrically compressed (compressed-bending) and eccentrically stretched (stretched-bending) elements made of
steel with a standard resistance R yn ≤ 440 N/mm 2 , not directly exposed to dynamic loads, at stresses τ < 0.5 R s and σ = N / A n > 0.1 R y should be
performed using the formula

(105)

where N , M x and M y , B are the absolute values ​of the longitudinal force, bending moments and bimoment, respectively, in their most unfavorable
combination;

n , c x , c y - coefficients adopted according to Table E.1 (Appendix E).

If σ = N / А n ≤ 0.1 R y , formula ( 105 ) should be applied when fulfilling the requirements of 8.5.8 and Table E.1 (Appendix E).

The strength calculation of elements in cases not provided for by the calculation using formula ( 105 ) should be performed using the formula

( N / A n ± M x y / I xn ± M y x / I yn ± Bω / I ωn )/( R y γ c ) ≤ 1, (106)

where x , y are the distances from the principal axes to the section point under consideration.

9.1.2 The strength calculation of eccentrically compressed (compressed-bending) elements according to formula ( 105 ) does not need to be
performed if the value of the reduced relative eccentricity m ef ≤ 20 ( 9.2.2 ), there is no weakening of the section and the same values ​of the bending
moments taken in the strength and stability calculations.

9.1.3 Eccentrically compressed (compressed-bending) elements made of steel with a standard resistance R yn > 440 N/mm 2 , with asymmetric
sections relative to the axis perpendicular to the bending plane (for example, sections of types 10, 11 according to Table D.2 ), should be checked for
the strength of the stretched fiber of the section in the plane of action of the moment according to the formula

(107)

where W tn is the section modulus calculated for the stretched fiber;

δ is a coefficient determined by the formula

(108)

In this case, N should be taken with the “-” sign.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

9.2 Calculation of stability of solid section elements

9.2.1 The calculation of the stability of eccentrically compressed (compressed-bending) elements under the action of a moment in one of the main
planes should be performed both in this plane (plane mode of loss of stability) and from this plane (flexural-torsional mode of loss of stability).

9.2.2 The calculation of the stability of eccentrically compressed (compressed-bending) elements of constant cross-section (columns of multi-story
buildings - within the floor) in the plane of action of the moment, coinciding with the plane of symmetry, should be performed according to the formula
 N /( φ e AR y γ c ) ≤ 1. (109)

In formula ( 109 ), the coefficient of stability under compression with bending φ e should be determined according to table D.3 depending on the
conditional flexibility and the reduced relative eccentricity m ef , determined according to the formula

m ef = ηm , (110)

where η is the coefficient of influence of the cross-section shape, determined according to Table D.2 (Appendix D);

m = eA / W c - relative eccentricity (here e = M / N - eccentricity, when calculating which the values ​of M and N should be taken in accordance with
the requirements of 9.2.3 );

W c is the section modulus calculated for the most compressed fiber).

For values ​of m ef > 20, the calculation should be performed as for bending elements (section 8 ).

9.2.3 The calculated values ​of the longitudinal force N and the bending moment M in the element should be taken for the same combination of loads
from the calculation of the system according to the undeformed scheme under the assumption of elastic deformations of the steel.

In this case, the values ​of M should be taken as equal to:

for a column of constant cross-section of a frame system - the greatest moment within the length of the column;

for a stepped column - the greatest moment along the length of a section of constant cross-section;

for a column with one end clamped and the other free - the moment at the clamping, but not less than the moment at the section located one third of
the column length from the clamping;

for compressed chords of trusses and structural slabs that bear an off-node transverse load - the greatest moment within the middle third of the
length of the chord panel, determined by calculating the chord as an elastic continuous beam;

for a compressed rod with hinged ends and a cross-section having one axis of symmetry coinciding with the plane of bending, the moment
determined by the formulas in Table 20 depending on the relative eccentricity m max = M max A /( NW c ) and taken to be equal to at least 0.5 M max .

Table 20

Relative eccentricity m max Moment M at conditional flexibility of the rod

<4 ≥4

m max ≤ 3 М = М max - 0.25 ( М max - M 1 ) M = M​

3 < mmax ≤ 20 М = M2 + (mmax - 3)(Мmax - M2)/17 М = M 1 + ( m max - 3 )( М max - M 1 )/17

Designations adopted in Table 20:

M max - the greatest bending moment within the length of the rod;

M 1 - the greatest bending moment within the middle third of the rod length, taken to be equal to at least 0.5 M max ;

M 2 is the bending moment, taken equal to M for m max ≤ 3 and < 4, but not less than 0.5 M max .

For compressed rods of a doubly symmetric solid section with hinged ends on which bending moments act, the value of m ef , necessary for
determining φ e , should be taken according to Table D.5 (Appendix D).

9.2.4 The calculation of the stability of eccentrically compressed (compressed-bending) rods of solid constant cross-section, except for box-shaped
ones, from the plane of action of the moment during their bending in the plane of greatest rigidity ( I x > I y ) coinciding with the plane of symmetry, as
well as channels should be performed according to the formula

N/(cφyARyγc) ≤ 1, (111)
where c is a coefficient determined in accordance with the requirements of 9.2.5 ;

φ y is the coefficient of stability under central compression, determined in accordance with the requirements of 7.1.3 .

9.2.5 The coefficient c in formula ( 111 ) should be determined:

for values ​m x ≤ 5 according to the formula

c = β /(1 + αm x ) ≤ 1, (112)

where α , β are coefficients determined according to Table 21 ;

for values ​m x ≥ 10 according to the formula

c = 1/(1 + mxφy/φb), (113)

where φ b is the bending stability coefficient determined according to the requirements of 8.4.1 and Appendix G as for a beam with two or more
fastenings of the compressed chord;

for values ​5 < m x < 10 according to the formula

c = cs(2 - 0,2mx) + c10(0,2mx - 1), (114)

where it is necessary to determine: c s - according to formula ( 112 ) with m x = 5; c 10 - according to formula ( 113 ) with m x = 10. Here m x = ( M x / N
)( A / W c ) is the relative eccentricity, where M x should be taken according to 9.2.6 .

For flexibility > 3.14, the coefficient c should not exceed the values ​of c max , determined according to Appendix D ; if c > c max , in formulas ( 111 )
and ( 117 ), c max should be taken instead of c .

If the ratio of the section width to its height is less than 0.3, the coefficient c should be taken as equal to 0.3.

Table 21

Section Section diagram and Values ​of the coefficients

type eccentricity

α at β at

mx ≤ 1 1 < mx ≤ 5 ≤ > 3,14

3,14

1 0,7 0,65 + 0,05mx 1

3
 4 1 - 0.3 I 2 / I 1 - (0,35 - 0,05 1 1 - (1 - )( 2 I 2 / I 1 - 1); β = 1 for I 2 / I 1 < 0.5
1 mx)I2/I1

Designations adopted in Table 21:

I 1 and I 2 are the moments of inertia of the larger and smaller shelves relative to the axis of symmetry of the section y - y, respectively;

φ с - value of φ y at = 3.14.

9.2.6 When determining the relative eccentricity m x in formulas ( 112 ) - ( 114 ), the following should be taken as the design moment M x :

for rods with ends secured against displacement perpendicular to the plane of action of the moment - the maximum moment within the middle third of
the length, but not less than half of the greatest moment along the length of the rod;

for rods with one end clamped and the other free - the moment at the clamping point, but not less than the moment at the section located one third of
the length of the rod from the clamping point.

9.2.7 The calculation of the stability of eccentrically compressed (compressed-bending) I-section elements, continuously reinforced along one of the
shelves, should be performed according to the appendix using formula ( 111 ), taking into account formula ( D.4 ) of Appendix D.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

9.2.8 Eccentrically compressed (compressed-bending) elements of constant cross-section, bent in the plane of least rigidity ( I y < I x and е y ≠ 0),
should be calculated using formula ( 109 ), and with flexibility λ х > λ y - also checked by calculating for stability from the plane of action of the
moment as centrally compressed elements using formula

N /( φ x AR y γ c ) ≤ 1, (115)

φ x is the coefficient of stability under central compression, determined in accordance with the requirements of 7.1.3 .

For λ x ≤ λ y, stability checks from the plane of action of the moment are not required.

9.2.9 The stability calculation of rods of solid constant cross-section (except box-shaped), subjected to compression and bending in two principal
planes, with the plane of greatest rigidity ( I x > I y ) coinciding with the plane of symmetry, as well as with a type 3 cross-section (see Table 21 ),
should be performed using the formula

N/(φexyARyγc) ≤ 1, (116)

Where

(117)

Here it is necessary to determine:

φ ey - according to the requirements of 9.2.2 , taking in the formulas instead of m and , respectively, m y and ;

c - according to the requirements of 9.2.5 :

When calculating the value m ef ,у = ηm y for I-section rods with unequal flanges, the coefficient η should be determined as for section type 8
according to Table D.2 (Appendix D).

If m ef , y < m x , then in addition to the calculation using formula ( 116 ), an additional check should be made using formulas ( 109 ) and ( 111 ), taking
е y = 0.

If λ x > λ y , then in addition to the calculation using formula ( 116 ), an additional check should be performed using formula ( 109 ), taking е y = 0.

The values ​of relative eccentricities should be calculated using the formulas:

m x = f x A / W cx ; (118)
 My = еyА/Wcy, (119)

where W cx and W cy are the moments of resistance of the sections for the most compressed fiber relative to the x - x and y -y axes , respectively.

If the plane of greatest rigidity of the rod section ( I x > I y ) does not coincide with the plane of symmetry, then the calculated value of m x should be
increased by 25% (except for section type 3 according to Table 21 ).

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

9.2.10 Calculation of the stability of rods of solid constant box-shaped section under compression with bending in one or two principal planes should
be performed according to the formulas:

N/(φeyARyγc) + Mx/(cxδxWx,minRyγc) ≤ 1, (120)

N/(φexARyγc) + My/(cyδyWy,minRyγc) ≤ 1, (121)

where φ ex , φ ey are the coefficients of stability under compression with bending, determined according to Table D.3 (Appendix D);

c x , c y - coefficients taken from Table E.1 (Appendix E);

δ x , δ y - coefficients determined by the formulas:

N/(φexARyγc) + My/(cyδyWy,minRyγc) ≤ 1, (122)

and taken to be equal to 1.0 at ≤ 1 and ≤ 1, respectively, while N should be taken with the “-” sign.

When bending in the plane of greatest rigidity ( I x > I y , М y = 0), φ y should be taken instead of φ ey .

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

9.3 Calculation of stability of through-section elements

9.3.1 When checking the stability of eccentrically compressed (compressed-bending) rods of through section with connecting strips or gratings, it is
necessary to perform both the calculation of the rod as a whole and of individual branches.

9.3.2 When calculating the rod as a whole relative to the free axis ( y - y ) according to formula ( 109 ), when the strips and lattices are located in
planes parallel to the plane of action of the moment, the coefficient φ e should be determined according to table D.4 depending on the conditional
reduced flexibility ( λ е f - according to table 8 ) and the relative eccentricity m , determined by the formula

m = eAa/I , (123)

where e = M / N is the eccentricity, when calculating which the values ​of M and N should be taken according to 9.2.3 ;

a - the distance from the main axis of the section, perpendicular to the plane of action of the moment, to the axis of the most compressed branch, but
not less than the distance to the axis of the branch wall;

I is the moment of inertia of the cross-section of a through rod relative to the free axis.

For values ​of m > 20, the stability calculation of the rod as a whole is not required; in this case, the calculation should be performed as for bending
elements.

9.3.3 When calculating individual branches of through bars with lattices using formula ( 7 ), the longitudinal force in each branch should be
determined taking into account the additional force from the moment. The value of this force should be calculated using the formulas:

= М y / b - when bending the rod in a plane perpendicular to the y - y axis , for sections of types 1 and 3 (see Table 8 );

= 0.5 М y / b 1 - the same for type 2 sections (see Table 8 );

= 1.16 M x / b - for bending of the rod in a plane perpendicular to the x - x axis , for type 3 sections (table 8 );

= 0.5 M x / b 2 - the same for type 2 sections (see Table 8 ),

where b , b1 , b2 are the distances between the branch axes (see table 8 ) .

When bending a through-section rod of type 2 (see Table 8 ) in two planes, the force should be determined using the formula

N ad = 0,5 ( М у / b 1 + М

(124)

9.3.4 When calculating individual branches of through rods with strips in formula ( 109 ), the additional force from the moment M and the local
bending of the branches from the actual or conditional transverse force (as in the chords of a diagonal-free truss) should be taken into account.

9.3.5 The calculation of the stability of eccentrically compressed (compressed-bending) triangular through bars with lattices and a constant equilateral
cross-section along the length should be carried out in accordance with the requirements of Section 16 .

9.3.6 The stability calculation of through rods from two solid-walled branches, symmetrical with respect to the x - x axis (Figure 12), with lattices in
two parallel planes, subject to compression and bending in both principal planes, should be performed:

for the rod as a whole - in a plane parallel to the planes of the lattices, according to the requirements of 9.3.2 , taking e x = 0;

for individual branches - as eccentrically compressed elements according to formulas ( 109 ) and ( 111 ); in this case, the longitudinal force in each
branch should be determined taking into account the additional force from the moment M y ( 9.3.3 ), and the moment M x should be distributed
between the branches as M x b = N b e x (see Figure 12 ); if the moment M x acts in the plane of one of the branches, then it should be considered to
be completely transmitted to this branch. When calculating according to formula ( 109 ), the flexibility of an individual branch should be determined
taking into account the requirements of 10.3.10 , and when calculating according to formula ( 111 ) - according to the maximum distance between the
lattice nodes.

Figure 12 - Diagram of a through section of a rod made of two

solid-walled branches

9.3.7 The calculation of connecting strips or lattices of through eccentrically compressed (compression-bending) rods should be performed in
accordance with 7.2.8 and 7.2.9 for a transverse force equal to the greater of two values: the actual transverse force Q , determined during the
calculation of the rod as an element of a diagonal-free truss, or the conditional transverse force Q fi c , calculated in accordance with the requirements
of 7.2.7 .

In cases where the actual transverse force is greater than the nominal one, the branches of through eccentrically compressed elements should be
connected with lattices.

9.4 Checking the stability of walls and belts

9.4.1 The calculated dimensions of the walls and flange sheets (shelves) being tested for stability should be taken in accordance with 7.3.1 and 7.3.7
.

9.4.2 The stability of the walls of eccentrically compressed (compressed-bending) elements should be considered ensured if the conditional flexibility
of the wall does not exceed the values ​of the ultimate conditional flexibility , determined using the formulas in Table
22.

Table 22

Section type Section diagram and Conditions for application of formulas Limit conditional flexibility of the wall
eccentricity

1 1 ≤ mx ≤ 10; <2 (125)

for an I-beam cφ y > (126)

φe
 2 cφy ≤ φe ;​​ (127)

1 ≤ α ≤ 2;

3 1 ≤ α ≤ 2; (128)

4 1 ≤ b f / h if ≤ 2; (129)

0,8 ≤ ≤4

5 my ≥ 1 (130)

Designations adopted in Table 22:

- conditional flexibility of the rod in the plane of action of the moment;

c cr - coefficient determined according to table 17 depending on α ;

α = ( σ 1 - σ 2 )/ σ 1 (here σ 1 is the greatest compressive stress at the design boundary of the wall, taken with the plus sign and calculated without
taking into account the coefficients φ e , cφ y and φ exy ; σ 2 is the corresponding stress at the opposite design boundary of the wall); β = 0.15 c cr τ
/ σ 1 (here τ = Q /( t w h w ) is the average shear stress in the section under consideration; for a box-shaped section τ = Q /(2 t w h w ); b f is the
width of the T-beam flange.

Notes

1 For type 1 sections with values ​0 < m x < 1 or 10 < m x ≤ 20, the values ​should be determined by linear interpolation between the values ​
calculated according to 7.3.2 ( m x = 0) or 8.5.1 ( m x = 20) and according to formula ( 125 ) or ( 126 ), respectively.

2 For a section of type 2 for α ≤ 0.5, the value should be determined twice: according to 7.3.2 and using formulas ( 125 ), ( 126 ); for 0.5 < α < 1 -
by linear interpolation between the values ​calculated for α = 0.5 and α = 1.

3 For section type 4 at < 0.8 or > 4 in formula ( 129 ) it should be taken = 0.8 or = 4, respectively.

4 For type 5 sections with values ​0 < m y < 1, the values ​should be determined by linear interpolation between the values ​calculated according to
7.3.2 ( m y = 0) and according to formula ( 130 ).

9.4.3 When the condition 0.8 ≤ N /( φ e AR y γ c ) ≤ 1 is met, the ultimate conditional flexibility calculated using formulas ( 125 ) and ( 126 ) is
increased by determining it using the formula

(131)

where and are the values ​calculated using formulas ( 125 ), ( 126 ) and ( 127 ).

If the condition N /( φ e AR y γ c ) < 0.8 is met, the value should be taken equal to .

9.4.4 The walls of eccentrically compressed (compressed-flexural) elements of solid cross-section (columns, posts, supports, etc.) should be
strengthened with transverse stiffeners at ≥ 2.3 in accordance with the requirements of 7.3.3 .

9.4.5 When strengthening the wall of an eccentrically compressed (compressed-bending) element with a longitudinal stiffener (with a moment of
inertia I rl ≥ 6 h ef t w 3 ), located in the middle of the wall, the most loaded part of the wall between the flange and the axis of the rib should be
considered as an independent plate and checked according to the formulas of Table 22 . In this case, the calculation and design of the rib and the
element as a whole should be performed taking into account the requirements of 7.3.4 .
9.4.6 In cases where the actual value of the nominal flexibility of the wall exceeds the limit value calculated for type 1 sections using the
formulas in Table 22 , and for type 2 and 3 sections taking into account note 2 of Table 22 (for α ≤ 0.5), the stability check of the member using
formulas ( 109 ), ( 115 ) and ( 116 ), as well as for α ≤ 0.5 using formula ( 111 ), should be performed taking into account the calculated reduced area
A d in accordance with 7.3.6 .

9.4.7 The stability of the chords (shelves) of eccentrically compressed (compressed-bending) rods with a flexibility of 0.8 ≤ ( ) ≤ 4 should be
considered ensured if the conditional flexibility of the chord (shelf) overhang or chord sheet
does not exceed the values ​of the ultimate conditional flexibility ( ) determined by the formulas in Table 23.

Table 23

Section Section diagram and Condition for application Limit conditional flexibility of the overhang of the belt or belt sheet with the
type eccentricity of formulas flexibility of the rod 0.8 ≤ ( ) ≤ 4

1 0 ≤ mx ≤ 5 (132)

2 (133)

3 - (134)

4 (135)

The designation adopted in Table 23:

- the ultimate value of the conditional flexibility of the overhang of the chord or chord sheet of the centrally compressed element, determined in
accordance with the requirements of 7.3.8 and 7.3.9 .

Notes

1 For 5 < m x ≤ 20, the values ​( ) should be determined by linear interpolation between the values ​( ) calculated using the formulas in this table
and in accordance with 8.5.18 and 8.5.19 (for m = 20), respectively.

2 If the rod flexibility is ( ) < 0.8 or ( ) > 4, 0.8 and 4 should be taken respectively.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

9.4.8 For shelves (walls) with bends (see Figure 5 ), the values ​of the ultimate conditional flexibility ( ), determined using the formulas in
Table 23 , should be multiplied by a coefficient of 1.5.

The dimensions of the bend should be determined in accordance with 7.3.10 .

9.4.9 When assigning sections of eccentrically compressed and compressed-flexural elements according to ultimate slenderness (Section 10.4 ), the
values ​of ultimate conditional slenderness of the wall , determined by the formulas of Table 22 , as well as of the chords ( ),
determined by the formulas of Table 23 and in accordance with 9.4.8 , should be increased by multiplying by a coefficient (here φ m is
the smaller of the values ​φ e , cφ y , φ exy , used when checking the stability of the element), but not more than by a factor of 1.25.

10 Design lengths and ultimate slenderness of steel structure elements

10.1 Calculated lengths of flat truss elements, column branches and braces
(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )
10.1.1 The calculated lengths of compressed elements of flat trusses and ties in their plane l ef and from the plane l ef , 1 (Figure 13 , a), b), c), d), with
the exception of the elements specified in 10.1.2 and 10.1.3 , should be taken from Table 24 .

a) - triangular with posts; b) - diagonal; c) - triangular with trusses;

d) - semi-diagonal triangular; d) - cross

Figure 13 - Schemes for determining the calculated lengths of compressed elements

(designations are given in Table 24 ) of truss lattices

10.1.2 The calculated lengths l ef and l ef , 1 of the upper chord of a truss (continuous rod) of constant cross-section with different compressive or
tensile forces in sections (the number of sections of equal length k ≥ 2) assuming a hinged connection (Figure 14 , a) of the lattice elements and
connections, should be determined using the formulas:

in the plane of the truss belt

lef = (0,17α3 + 0,83)l ≥ 0,8l, (136)

where α is the ratio of the force adjacent to the maximum force to the maximum force in the truss panels; in this case, 1 ≥ α ≥ -0.55;

from the plane of the truss belt

l ef , 1 = {0.75 + 0.25[ β /( k - 1)] 2 k - 3 } l 1 ≥ 0.5 l 1 , (137)

where β is the ratio of the sum of the forces in all sections (the considered length between the points of fastening of the belt from the plane), except
for the maximum, to the maximum force; in this case ( k - 1) ≥ β ≥ -0.5. When calculating the parameter β in formula ( 137 ), the tensile forces in the
rods must be taken with a minus sign.

Table 24

Direction of longitudinal bending of a truss element Calculated lengths l ef and l ef, 1

belts support braces and other lattice

support posts elements

1 In the plane of the truss l ef :

a) for farms other than those specified in position 1, b l l 0.8 l

b) for trusses made of single angles and trusses with lattice elements attached to the chords l l 0.9 l
end-to-end

2 In the direction perpendicular to the plane of the truss (from the plane of the truss) l ef, 1 :

a) for farms other than those specified in position 2, b l1 l1 l1

 b) for trusses with lattice elements attached to the chords end-to-end l1 l1 0.9 l 1

3 In any direction l ef = l ef, 1 for trusses made of single angles with the same distances 0.85 l 0.85 liters
between the points of fixing the elements in the plane and from the plane of the truss liters

Designations adopted in Table 24 (see Figure 13 ):

l is the geometric length of the element (the distance between the centers of the nearest nodes) in the plane of the truss;

l 1 - the distance between nodes secured from displacement from the plane of the truss (truss chords, special connections, rigid roof slabs
attached to the chord with welds or bolts, etc.).

The calculated lengths l ef and l ef , 1 of a branch of a continuous column of constant cross-section (continuous rod) with different compressive forces
in sections (the number of sections of equal length k ≥ 2) with boundary conditions when one end of the rod (lower) is rigidly fixed, and the other is
pivotally supported in the plane of the lattice with hinged fastening of the lattice elements to it (Figure 14 , b), should be determined using the
formulas:

in the plane of the branch

(138)

where α is the ratio of the force adjacent to the maximum force to the maximum force at the embedment point; in this case, 1 ≥ α ≥ 0;

from the plane of the branch

(139)

where β is the ratio of the sum of the forces in all areas except the maximum to the maximum force at the embedment point; in this case ( k - 1) ≥ β ≥
0.

In both cases, l is the length of the section (see Figures 13 and 14); l 1 is the distance between the connection points from the plane of the rod (see
Figure 14), and the stability calculation should be performed for the maximum force.

a) - truss belts; b) - column branches

Figure 14 - Schemes for determining the calculated length of elements

10.1.3 The calculated lengths l ef , 1 (when they do not depend on the ratio of forces) of the elements of the cross lattice, fastened together (see
Figure 13 , d), should be taken from Table 25. The calculated lengths of intersecting connections (see view 1-1 of Figure 14 , a) should be determined
in accordance with the rules for the design of steel structures.

Table 25
 Construction of the intersection node of lattice elements Calculated length l ef , 1 from the plane of the truss (connection) with a supporting
element

stretched not working compressed

Both elements are not interrupted l 0.7 l 1 l1

The supporting element is interrupted and covered with a

gusset:

the element in question is not interrupted 0.7 l 1 l1 1.4 l 1

the element in question is interrupted and covered by 0.7 l 1 - -

packaging

Designations adopted in Table 25 (see Figure 13 , d):

l - distance from the center of the truss node (connection) to the point of intersection of the elements;

l 1 - full geometric length of the element.

10.1.4 The radii of gyration i of the sections of elements made of single angles when determining flexibility should be taken as:

with a calculated length of the element of at least 0.85 l (where l is the distance between the centers of the nearest nodes) - minimal ( i = i m in );

in other cases - relative to the axis of the angle, perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the truss ( i = i x or i = i y ), depending on the direction of
longitudinal bending.

10.2 Calculated lengths of elements of spatial lattice structures, including structural

ones
10.2.1 The calculated lengths l e f of structural elements should be taken from Table 26 ( l is the geometric length of the element - the distance
between the centers of the nodes of the structural structures).

Table 26

Elements of structural designs The calculated

length l e f

1 In addition to those specified in positions 2 and 3 l

2 Continuous (not interrupted at the nodes) belts, as well as elements of belts and gratings, attached at the nodes by butt 0.85 liters
welding to spherical or cylindrical nodal elements

3 From single corners, attached to the nodes of one shelf:

a) welded seams or bolts (at least two) located along the element, at l / i min :

up to 90 l

over 90 to 120 0.90 l

over 120 to 150 (only for lattice elements) 0.75 l

 over 150 to 200 (only for lattice elements) 0.70 l

b) with one bolt at l / i min :

up to 90 l

over 90 to 120 0.95 l

over 120 to 150 (only for lattice elements) 0.85 liters

over 150 to 200 (only for lattice elements) 0,80l

10.2.2 The radii of gyration of sections i of elements of structural structures when determining flexibility should be taken as:

for compressed-bending elements - relative to the axis perpendicular to or parallel to the plane of bending ( i = i x or i = i y ); in other cases - minimal (
i = i min ).

10.2.3 The calculated lengths l ef and the radii of gyration of the sections i of compressed, stretched and unloaded elements of spatial structures
(Figure 15 ) made of single angles when determining flexibility should be taken from Tables 27 , 28 and 29 .

10.2.4 To determine the calculated lengths of the diagonals according to Figure 15 , c, when attaching them without gussets to the strut and chord
with welds or bolts (at least two) located along the diagonal, the value of the calculated length coefficient μ d should be taken from Table 29 with the
value of n "Up to 2". In the case of attaching their ends with one bolt, the value of μ d should be taken from Table 29 for attaching "With one bolt
without gusset", and when calculating the value of l ef according to Table 27, 0.5(1 + μ d ) should be taken instead of μ d .

10.2.5 The calculated lengths l ef and radii of gyration i of elements made of pipes or paired angles should be taken in accordance with 10.1.1 -
10.1.3 .

a), b), c) - with nodes aligned in adjacent faces; d), d) - with nodes not aligned
in adjacent faces; e) - with nodes partially aligned in adjacent faces

Figure 15 - Schemes of spatial lattice structures

Table 27

Elements of spatial structures Compressed and unloaded elements Stretched elements

lef i lef i

Belts:

according to Figure 15 , a), b), c) lm i min lm i min

according to Figure 15 , d), e) 0.73 l m i min 0.73 l m i min

 according to figure 15 , f) 0,64lm i min 0,64lm i min

Diagonals:

according to Figure 15 , a), e) μ d l dc i min ld(ld1) name ( i x​​

according to figure 15 , b), c), d), f) μdld i min ld i min

Spacers:

according to Figure 15 , b), f) 0,80lc i min - -

according to Figure 15 , c) 0.73 l c i min

Designations adopted in Table 27 (Figure 15 ):

l dc - conventional length, taken from table 28 ;

μ d - coefficient of the calculated length of the diagonal, taken from Table 29 .

Notes

1 The diagonals according to Figure 15 , a), d) must be fastened together at the intersection points.

2 The value of l ef for spacers according to Figure 15 , c) is given for equal-flange angles.

3 The values ​of l ef and i for diagonals from the plane of the structure face are given in brackets .

Table 28

Construction of the intersection node of the lattice elements Conventional length of diagonal l dc with supporting
element

stretched not working compressed

Both rods are not interrupted ld 1.3 l d 0.8 l d 1

The supporting element is interrupted and covered by a gusset; the element in question is
not interrupted:

in the designs according to Figure 15 , a) 1.3 l d 1.6 l d ld1

in the designs according to Figure 15 , d) (1,75 - 0,15n)ld (1,9 - 0,1n)ld ld1

The intersection node of the elements is secured against displacement from the plane of ld ld ld1
the face (by a diaphragm, etc.)

The designation adopted in Table 28 (Figure 15 ):

n = Im,minld/(Id,minIm),

where I m , min and I d , min are the smallest moments of inertia of the section of the belt and diagonal, respectively.

Note - For n < 1 and n > 3 in the table formulas, n = 1 and n = 3 should be taken respectively.

Table 2 9
 Attaching the brace to the belts The meaning of n The value of μ d at l / i min equal to

up to 60 over 60 to 160 St. 160

Welded seams, bolts (at least two), located along the diagonal Up to 2 1,14 0.54 + 36 i min / l 0,765

Over 6 1,04 0.54 + 28.8 i min / l 0,740

One bolt without a fitting For any values 1,12 0.64 + 28.8 i min / l 0,820

Designations adopted in Table 29 :

n - according to table 28 ;

l is the length, taken equal to: l d - for diagonals according to Figure 15 , b), c), d), e); l dc according to Table 28 - for diagonals according to Figure
15 , a), d).

Notes

1 The value of μ d for 2 ≤ n ≤ 6 should be determined by linear interpolation.

2 When attaching one end of the diagonal to the chord without gussets by welding or bolts, and the second end through a gusset, the coefficient of
the calculated length of the diagonal should be taken as 0.5(1 + μ d ); when attaching both ends of the diagonals through gussets - μ d = 1.0.

10.3 Calculated lengths of columns (posts)

10.3.1 The calculated lengths l ef of columns (posts) of constant cross-section or individual sections of stepped columns should be determined using
the formula

lef = μl, (140)

where l is the length of the column, its individual section or the height of the floor;

μ - coefficient of calculated length.

10.3.2 When determining the coefficients of the calculated length of columns (racks), the values ​of the longitudinal forces in the elements of the
system should be taken for the combination of loads for which the stability check of the columns (racks) is performed in accordance with Sections 7
and 9 .

The values ​of the coefficients of the calculated length μ for columns of constant cross-section and individual sections of stepped columns for any
combination of loads are accepted as for columns of constant cross-section and individual sections of stepped columns in the calculated structure for
a combination of loads that gives the greatest values ​of longitudinal forces.

In this case, it is necessary to distinguish between non-free (unfastened) frames, in which the nodes for fastening the beams to the columns do not
have freedom of movement in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the column in the plane of the frame, and free (unfastened) frames, in which
such movements are possible (see Figure 1 ).

10.3.3 The coefficients of the calculated length μ of columns (posts) of constant cross-section should be determined depending on the conditions of
fixing their ends and the type of load. For certain end fixing schemes and types of load, the values ​of μ are given in Table 30.

Table 30

Column (post) fixing scheme and type of load

m 1,0 0,7 0,5 2,0 1,0 2,0 0,725 1,12

The coefficients of the calculated length of columns (posts) of constant cross-section with elastic fixing of the ends should be determined using the
formulas given in the code of rules for the design of steel structures.

10.3.4 The coefficients of the calculated length μ of columns of constant cross-section in the plane of free or non-free frames with the same loading of
nodes located at the same level should be determined using the formulas of Table 31. In free frames with rigid fastening of the column bases (0.03 ≤
p ≤ 50) and hinged fastening of the beams to the upper ends of the columns in formulas ( 142 ) and ( 143 ), n = 0 should be taken .

Table 3 1

Frame diagram Parameters Calculated length coefficient

p n

Free frames

p=0 (141)

k≥2

p=∞ (142)

k≥2

Top floor

For n ≤ 0.2

Middle floor (143)

Ground floor for n > 0.2

(144)
 Special cases

p=0 from 0.03 to 0.2

over 0.2

0,03 ≤ p ≤ 50 ∞

p=∞ from 0.03 to 0.2

over 0.2

Non-free frames

Top floor (145)

0.5 ( p1 + p2 )​ n1+n2

Middle floor

0.5 ( p1 + p2 )​ 0.5 ( n1 + n2 )​

Ground floor

(p1+p2) 0.5 ( n1 + n2 )​

Special cases

p=0

p=∞
 Designations adopted in Table 31:

I s 1 , I s 2 and I i 1 , I i 2 are the moments of inertia of the cross-section of the beams adjacent to the upper and lower ends of the column being
tested, respectively;

I c , l c - respectively the moment of inertia of the section and the length of the column being tested;

l , l 1 , l 2 - frame spans;

k - number of spans;

Note - For the outermost column of a free multi-span frame, the coefficient μ should be determined with the values ​of p and n as for the
columns of a single-span frame.

10.3.5 When the ratio H / B ≥ 6 (where H is the total height of the free multi-storey frame, B is the width of the frame), the overall stability of the frame
as a whole as a composite rod, clamped at the base and free at the top, must be checked.

10.3.6 In case of uneven loading of the upper nodes of columns in a free single-story frame and the presence of a rigid roof disk or longitudinal ties
along the top of all columns, the coefficient of the calculated length μ ef of the most loaded column in the plane of the frame should be determined
using the formula

(146)

where μ is the coefficient of the calculated length of the column being tested, calculated using formulas ( 141 ) and ( 142 );

I c , N c - moment of inertia of the section and force in the most loaded column of the frame under consideration, respectively;

∑ N i , ∑ I i - the sum of the calculated forces and moments of inertia of the sections of all columns of the frame under consideration and four adjacent
frames (two on each side), respectively; all forces should be determined with the same combination of loads that causes the force N c in the column
being tested.

10.3.7 The coefficients of the calculated length μ of individual sections of stepped columns in the plane of the frame should be determined in
accordance with Appendix I or on the basis of a calculation scheme that takes into account the actual conditions of fixing the ends of the columns,
taking into account 10.3.1 and 10.3.2 .

When determining the coefficients of the design dyna μ for stepped columns of frames of single-story industrial buildings, the influence of the degree
of loading and rigidity of adjacent columns is not taken into account; for multi-span frames (with two or more spans) in the presence of a rigid roof
disk or longitudinal ties connecting all columns at the top and ensuring the spatial operation of the structure, the design lengths of the columns should
be determined as for posts fixed at the level of the beams.

10.3.8 The coefficients of the calculated length μ , determined for columns of free single-story (in the absence of a rigid roof disk) and multi-story
frames, should be reduced by multiplying by the coefficient ѱ , determined by the formula

ѱ = 1 - α [1 - ( ω /5) 2 ] 5/4 , (147)

where α = 0.65 - 0.9 β + 0.25 β 2 ;

It is indicated here:

β = 1 - М 1 / М ≤ 0.2; m = MA /( NW c );

- conditional flexibility of the column, calculated taking into account the requirements of 7.3.2 and 7.3.3 .

The calculated values ​of the longitudinal force N and the bending moment M in the calculated free frame should be determined in accordance with
9.2.3 .

bending moment M1 should be determined for the same combination of loads in the same section of the column where the moment M
The value of the
acts , considering the frame in this design case as non-free.
10.3.9 The calculated lengths of columns in the direction along the building (from the plane of the frame) should be taken as equal to the distances
between points secured from displacement from the plane of the frame (column supports, overhead crane beams and purlin trusses, attachment
points for ties and beams, etc.) or determined on the basis of a calculation scheme that takes into account the actual conditions for securing the ends
of the columns.

10.3.10 The calculated length of the branches of flat supports of conveyor galleries should be taken as equal to:

in the longitudinal direction of the gallery - the height of the support (from the bottom of the base to the axis of the lower chord of the truss or beam),
multiplied by the coefficient μ , determined as for posts of constant cross-section depending on the conditions of fastening their ends;

in the transverse direction (in the plane of the support) - the distance between the centers of the nodes; in this case, the overall stability of the support
as a whole as a composite rod, clamped at the base and free at the top, must be checked.

10.3.11 Determination of the calculated lengths of columns (posts), including compressed elements of spatial lattice structures, using certified
software computing systems is performed under the assumption of elastic operation of steel according to an undeformed scheme.

10.4 Limit slenderness of elements

10.4.1 The slenderness of elements λ = l e f / i must not exceed the limit values ​λ u given in Table 32 for compressed elements and in Table 33 for
tensioned elements.

10.4.2 For structural elements that, according to Appendix B, belong to group 4 in buildings and structures of all classes according to GOST 27751 ,
the value of ultimate flexibility is increased by 10%.

Table 32

Elements of construction Ultimate flexibility of

compressed elements λ u

1 Belts, support diagonals and pillars transmitting support reactions:

a) flat trusses, structural structures and spatial structures made of pipes or paired angles up to 50 m high 180 - 60 a

b) spatial structures made of single corners, as well as spatial structures made of pipes and paired corners with a 120
height of over 50 m

2 Elements other than those specified in positions 1 and 7:

a) flat trusses, welded spatial and structural structures made of single angles, spatial and structural structures 210 - 60 a
made of pipes and paired angles

b) spatial and structural structures made of single angles with bolted connections 220 - 60 a

3 Upper chords of trusses not secured during installation (maximum flexibility after completion of installation should 220
be taken according to position 1)

4 Main Columns 180 - 60 a

5 Secondary columns (half-timbered posts, lanterns, etc.), elements of the column lattice, elements of vertical 210 - 60 a
connections between columns (below crane runway beams), beams and purlins, taking into account compression
work

6 Elements of connections, except those specified in position 5, as well as rods used to reduce the calculated 200
length of compressed rods, and other unloaded elements, except those specified in position 7

7 Compressed and unloaded elements of spatial structures of T- and cross-sections subject to wind loads, when 150
checking flexibility in the vertical plane
 The designation adopted in Table 32:

- a coefficient taken to be no less than 0.5 (in appropriate cases, φ e should be taken instead of φ ).

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

Table 33

Elements of construction Ultimate flexibility of stretched elements λ u when

loads act on the structure

dynamic, applied static from cranes (see

directly to the note 4) and trains
structure

1 Chords and supporting diagonals of flat trusses (including brake trusses) and structural 250 400 250
structures

2 Elements of trusses and structural structures other than those specified in position 1 350 400 300

3 Lower chords of beams and trusses of crane tracks - - 150

4 Elements of vertical connections between columns (below the crane runway beams) 300 300 200

5 Other elements of connections 400 400 300

6 Belts and support braces of racks and crossbars, crossbar rods of power transmission line 250 - -
supports, open switchgears and transport contact networks

7 Elements of supports for power transmission lines, open switchgear and contact networks 350 - -
of transport, except for those specified in positions 6 and 8

8 Elements of spatial structures of T- and cross-sections (and in the rods of the cross-arms of 150 - -
power transmission line supports and from single angles), subject to wind loads, when
checking flexibility in the vertical plane

Notes

1 In structures not subject to dynamic loads, the flexibility of tension elements should be checked only in vertical planes.

2 For connection elements (position 5), for which the deflection under the action of their own weight does not exceed I /150, when static loads act
on the structure, λ u = 500 is taken.

3 The flexibility of pre-stressed tension elements (tie rods with turnbuckles) is not limited.

4 The values ​of maximum flexibility should be taken for cranes of operating mode groups 7K (in metallurgical production shops) and 8K in
accordance with SP 20.13330 .

5 For the lower chords of beams and trusses of crane tracks for cranes of operating mode groups 1K - 6K, λ u = 200 is taken.

6 Dynamic loads applied directly to the structure include loads taken into account in fatigue calculations or taking into account dynamic factors
according to SP 20.13330 .
11 Calculation of sheet structures

11.1 Strength calculation

11.1.1 The strength calculation of sheet structures (shells of revolution) in a momentless stress state should be performed using the formula

(148)

where σ x and σ y are normal stresses in two mutually perpendicular directions;

γ c is the coefficient of operating conditions of structures, assigned in accordance with the requirements of SP 43.13330 .

In this case, the absolute values ​of the main stresses must not be greater than the values ​of the calculated resistances multiplied by γ c .

11.1.2 Stresses in momentless thin-walled shells of revolution (Figure 16 ) under pressure of liquid, gas or bulk material should be determined using
the formulas:

(149)

σ2 = (p/t - σ1/r1)r2, (150)

where σ 1 and σ 2 are the meridional and hoop stresses, respectively;

F - projection onto the z - z axis of the shell of the total design pressure acting on the part of the shell abc (see Figure 16 );

r and β are the radius and angle shown in Figure 16 ;

t - shell thickness;

p - calculated pressure on the shell surface;

r 1 , r 2 - radii of curvature in the principal directions of the middle surface of the shell.

Figure 16 - Diagram of a shell of revolution

11.1.3 Stresses in closed momentless thin-walled shells of revolution under internal uniform pressure should be determined using the formulas:

for cylindrical shells

σ1 = pr/(2t); σ2 = pr/t; (151)

for spherical shells

σ1 = σ2 = pr/(2t); (152)

for conical shells

 (153)

where p is the calculated internal pressure per unit surface area of ​the shell;

r is the radius of the middle surface of the shell (Figure 17 );

β is the angle between the cone generator and its z - z axis (see Figure 17 ).

Figure 17 - Schematic diagram of a conical shell of revolution

11.1.4 When checking the strength of shells in places where their shape or thickness changes, as well as where the load changes, local stresses
(edge ​effect) should be taken into account.

11.1.5 Stresses and forces in shells of any configuration should be performed in accordance with the requirements of 11.1.2 - 11.1.4 , as well as
using certified software packages for calculations using a spatial calculation scheme.

11.2 Stability calculation

11.2.1 The stability calculation of closed circular cylindrical shells of revolution, uniformly compressed parallel to the generatrices, should be
performed according to the formula

(154)

where σ 1 is the calculated stress in the shell;

σ cr, 1 - critical stress equal to the smaller of the values ​ѱR y or cEt / r (here r is the radius of the middle surface of the shell; t is the shell thickness) at
r / t ≤ 300; at r / t > 300 σ cr, 1 = cEt / r .

The values ​of the coefficients ѱ for 0 < r / t ≤ 300 should be determined by the formula

ѱ = 0.97 - (0.00025 + 0.95 R y / E ) r / t. (155)

The values ​of the coefficient c should be determined according to Table 34.

Table 34

r/t 100 200 300 400 600 800 1000 1500 2500

with 0,22 0,18 0,16 0,14 0,11 0,09 0,08 0,07 0,06

In the case of eccentric compression parallel to the generatrices or pure bending in the diametrical plane with tangential stresses at the location of
the greatest moment not exceeding the value of 0.07 E ( t / r ) 3/2 , the stress σ cr ,1 should be increased by (1.1 - 0.1 σ′ 1 / σ 1 ) times, where σ′ 1 is
the smallest stress (tensile stresses are considered negative).

11.2.2 In pipes calculated as compressed or eccentrically compressed rods with conditional flexibility , the condition must
be satisfied
 (156)

Such pipes shall be designed for stability in accordance with the requirements of Sections 7 and 9 , regardless of the wall stability calculation. Wall
stability calculation of seamless or electric-welded pipes is not required if the r / t values ​do not exceed half the values ​determined by formula ( 156 ).

11.2.3 A cylindrical panel supported by two generatrices and two guide arcs, uniformly compressed along the generatrices, with b 2 /( rt ) ≤ 20 (where
b is the width of the panel measured along the guide arc) must be designed for stability as a plate using the formulas:

when calculating stress σ ≤ 0.8 R y

(157)

when calculating the stress σ = R y

(158)

At 0.8 R y < σ < R y the largest b / t ratio should be determined by linear interpolation.

If b 2 /( rt ) > 20, the panel should be designed for stability as a shell in accordance with the requirements of 11.2.1 .

11.2.4 The calculation of the stability of a closed circular cylindrical shell of revolution, under the action of an external uniform pressure p , normal to
the lateral surface, should be performed according to the formula

σ 2 /( σ cr ,2 γ c ) ≤ 1, (159)

where σ 2 = pr / t is the calculated hoop stress in the shell;

σ cr ,2 - critical stress, determined by the formulas:

at 0.5 ≤ l / r ≤ 10

σcr,2 = 0,55E(r/l)(t/r)3/2; (160)

at l / r ≥ 20

σcr,2 = 0,17E(t/r)2; (161)

for 10 < l / r < 20 the stress σ cr ,2 should be determined by linear interpolation.

Here l is the length of the cylindrical shell.

The same shell, but reinforced with ring ribs located with a step of s ≥ 0.5 r between the axes, must be calculated for stability according to formulas (
159 ) - ( 161 ) with the value of s substituted in them instead of l .

In this case, the condition of stability of the rib in its plane as a compressed rod must be satisfied according to the requirements of 7.1.3 with N = prs
and the calculated length of the rod l ef = 1.8 r ; in this case, the section of the rib should include sections of the shell with a width of 65 on
each side of the axis of the rib, and the conditional flexibility of the rod should not exceed 6.5.

For a one-sided stiffener, its moment of inertia should be calculated relative to the axis coinciding with the nearest surface of the shell.

11.2.5 The stability calculation of a closed circular cylindrical shell of revolution subjected to the simultaneous action of the loads specified in 11.2.1
and 11.2.4 should be performed using the formula

( σ 1 / σ cr ,1 + σ 2 / σ cr ,2 )/ γ c ≤ 1, (162)

where σ cr ,1 must be calculated according to the requirements of 11.2.1 and σ cr ,2 - according to the requirements of 11.2.4 .
11.2.6 The stability calculation of a conical shell of revolution with a cone angle β ≤ 60°, compressed by a force N along the axis (Figure 18 ), should
be performed according to the formula

N/(Ncrγc) ≤ 1, (163)

where N cr is the critical force determined by the formula

Ncr = 6,28tσcr,1rmcos2β, (164)

here t is the shell thickness;

σ cr ,1 - stress value calculated according to the requirements of 11.2.1 with the radius r replaced by the radius r m , equal to

rm = (0,9r2 + 0,1r1)/cosβ. (165)

11.2.7 The calculation of the stability of a conical shell of revolution under the action of an external uniform pressure p , normal to the lateral surface,
should be performed according to the formula

σ 2 /( σ cr ,2 γ c ) ≤ 1, (166)

here σ 2 = рr m / t is the calculated hoop stress in the shell;

σ cr ,2 - critical stress, determined by the formula

σcr,2 = 0,55E(rm/h)(t/rm)3/2, (167)

where r m is the radius determined by the formula ( 165 );

h is the height of the conical shell (between the bases).

Figure 18 - Diagram of a conical shell of revolution under the action

of a longitudinal compression force

11.2.8 The stability calculation of a conical shell of revolution subjected to the simultaneous action of the loads specified in 11.2.6 and 11.2.7 should
be performed using the formula

(N/Ncr + σ2/σcr,2)/γc ≤ 1, (168)

where the values ​of N cr and σ cr ,2 should be calculated using formulas ( 164 ) and ( 167 ).

11.2.9 The calculation of the stability of a complete spherical shell (or its segment) at r / t ≤ 750 and the action of an external uniform pressure p ,
normal to its surface, should be performed according to the formula

σ /( σ cr γ c ) ≤ 1, (169)

where σ = pr /(2 t ) is the design stress;

σ cr = 0.1 Et / r - critical stress, taken to be equal to no more than R y ,

here r is the radius of the middle surface of the sphere.

12 Calculation of steel structure elements for fatigue

12.1 General provisions for calculation

12.1.1 When designing steel structures and their elements (crane track beams, work platform beams, elements of bunker and unloading trestles,
engine structures, etc.) that directly bear repeatedly acting moving, vibration or other types of loads with a number of loading cycles of 105 or more,
leading to the phenomenon of fatigue, it is necessary to use such design solutions that do not cause significant stress concentration and check them
by fatigue calculations.

The number of loading cycles should be taken in accordance with the technological requirements of operation.

The calculation of structures for fatigue should be carried out for the action of loads established in accordance with SP 20.13330 .

Fatigue calculations should also be performed for structures of tall buildings (such as masts, towers, etc.) that are subject to the effects of resonant
vortex excitation in accordance with SP 20.13330 .

12.1.2 Fatigue calculations should be made using the formula

(170)

where σ max is the largest absolute value stress in the calculated cross-section of the element, calculated based on the net cross-section without
taking into account the dynamic coefficient and the coefficients φ , φ b , φ e ;

R v - the calculated fatigue resistance, taken from Table 35 depending on the ultimate strength of steel R un and the groups of elements and
connections of structures given in Table K.1 (Appendix K );

α is a coefficient taking into account the number of loading cycles n ,

for n ≥ 3.9·10 6 taken as α = 0.77;

for n < 3.9·10 6 calculated using the formulas:

for groups of elements 1 and 2

α = 0.064( n /10 6 ) 2 - 0.5( n /10 6 ) + 1.75; (171)

for groups of elements 3 - 8

α = 0.07( n /10 6 ) 2 - 0.64( n /10 6 ) + 2.2; (172)

γ v is the coefficient determined according to Table 36 depending on the stress state and the stress asymmetry coefficient ρ = σ min / σ max (here σ min
is the smallest absolute value stress in the calculated cross-section of the element, calculated in the same way and under the same loading as σ max ) . For different stresses σ max and σ
min , the value of the coefficient ρ should be taken with a minus sign.

When calculating according to formula ( 170 ), the condition αR v γ v ≤ R u γ u must be met .

Table 35

Group of elements The value of R v at the standard value of the ultimate strength of steel R un , N/mm 2

up to 420 St. 420 to 440 St. 440 to 520 over 520 to 580 St. 580 to 675

1 120 128 132 136 145

2 100 106 108 110 116

3 For all steel grades 90

 4 Same 75

5 « 60

6 « 45

7 « 36

8 « 27

12.1.3 Steel structures and their elements that directly bear loads with a number of loading cycles less than 10 5 should be designed using design
solutions that do not cause significant stress concentrations. In other cases, steel structures and their elements should be checked by low-cycle
fatigue calculations in accordance with design rules.

Table 36

Stress state (for σ m ax ) Stress asymmetry coefficient ρ Formulas for calculating the coefficient γ v

Stretching -1 ≤ p ≤ 0 2,5

1.5 - p

0< ρ ≤ 0,8 2,0

1.2 - p

0,8 < ρ < 1 1,0

1-p

Compression -1 ≤ ρ < 1 2,0

1-p

12.2 Calculation of crane track beams

The fatigue calculation of crane runway beams should be performed in accordance with the requirements of 12.1.1 and 12.1.2 for crane loads
determined in accordance with SP 20.13330 . In this case, α = 0.77 should be taken for cranes of operating mode groups 7K (in metallurgical
production shops) and 8K, and α = 1.1 in other cases. The fatigue calculation of the upper zone of the walls of composite crane runway beams under
crane loads determined in accordance with SP 20.13330 should be performed using the formula

(173)

where R v is the calculated fatigue resistance, adopted for all grades of steel, equal for beams with welded and friction belt connections, respectively:

for the compressed upper zone of the wall (sections in the beam span)

R v = 75 N/mm 2 and 96 N/mm 2 ;

for the tensioned upper zone of the wall (support sections of continuous beams)

R v = 65 N/mm 2 and 89 N/mm 2 .

The stress values ​in formula ( 173 ) should be determined using formulas ( 67 ).

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

13 Design of steel structures to prevent brittle fracture
13.1 When designing steel structures, the possibility of brittle failure arising from the unfavourable influence of a combination of the following factors
should be excluded:

low temperature at which steel, depending on its chemical composition, structure and thickness of the rolled product, becomes brittle;

effects of moving, dynamic and vibration loads;

high local stresses caused by the impact of concentrated loads or deformations of the connection parts, as well as welding and residual stresses;

stress concentrators oriented transversely to the direction of action of tensile stresses.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

13.2 To prevent brittle failure of structures, the following should be done:

select steel according to the requirements of 5.2 and Table B.1 (Appendix B);

avoid placing welded seams in areas where tensile stresses exceed 0.4 R y ;

take measures to reduce the adverse effects of stress concentration and work hardening caused by the design solution or arising during various
technological operations (straightening, bending, guillotine cutting, punching holes, etc.);

avoid crossing weld seams;

use lead-out strips and non-destructive methods of quality control of seams - for welded joints;

take into account that solid wall structures have fewer stress concentrators than lattice structures;

do not extend the flank seams to the joint axis by at least 25 mm on each side - in the joints of elements covered by overlays;

when guillotine cutting edges and punching holes, use the smallest thicknesses of section elements;

fasten the gussets of connections, auxiliary and other secondary elements to the stretched elements of structures using bolts.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

13.3 When using rolled products with a thickness of s ≥ 25 mm made of steels higher than C355 in welded joints in T- and corner joints, as well as in
welded seams with full penetration, one of the elements of which experiences tensile stresses across the thickness of the sheet, and the remaining
rolled products with a thickness of more than 40 mm, there is a risk of lamellar failure (a defect in the rolled product formed under the action of
welding, in the form of lamellar cracks parallel to the plane of the rolled product). Such a defect is detected during ultrasonic quality control of the
seams.

The occurrence of layered failure depends significantly on the shape of the joints and the location of the welds, the size of the weld, the thickness of
the welded elements, the degree of rigidity of the joint and the welding technology, as well as on the category of continuity of the rolled product
according to GOST 27772 , GOST R 54864 , GOST R 57837 , GOST R 58064 .

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

13.4 The tendency of rolled products to lamellar failure should be determined by tensile tests based on the value of relative contraction ѱ z on
samples whose axis is normal to the surface of the rolled product.

13.5 The possibility of layered destruction is excluded by observing the condition

Ψzp ≤ Ψzн,

where Ψ zp is the total risk factor, %;

Ψ zн - standardized, %, value of the risk factor for rolled products in accordance with the current standard;

Ψ zн = 15, Ψ zн = 25, Ψ zн = 35 respectively for rolled product quality groups Z15, Z25, Z35. In this case, rolled products according to 13.3 must
satisfy: for structures of group 1 according to Appendix B (for structures of class KS-3 according to GOST 27751 ), as well as for flange connections
according to 15.9.10 and in the case when the force is normal to the sheet surface - the requirements of quality group Z35; for other structures of
groups 1, 2, 3 according to Appendix B (for structures of class KS-2 according to GOST 27751 ) - the requirements of quality group Z25; for
structures of group 4 according to Appendix B (for structures of class KS-1 according to GOST 27751 ) - the requirements of quality group Z15.

The calculated value of ψ zp should be determined using the formula

 ψ zp = ψ z ф + ψ z т + ψ z ш + ψ z ж + ψ z с , (174)

where ψ z ф is the shape of the connection and the location of the welds;

ψ z t - thickness of the welded rolled product;

ψ z ш - leg of the seam;

ψ z ж - degree of rigidity of the connection;

ψ z с - the influence of welding technology (the total factor of the number of passes, the sequence of seams and heating).

The values ​of ψ z f , ψ z t , ψ z sh , ψ z zh , ψ z s are presented in Table 37.

The calculated value can be reduced by 50% in the case of the material operating under static compression across the thickness and increased by
10% in the case of dynamic or vibration loads across the thickness.

Table 37

The shape of the joint and the location of the weld, ψ z ф

Characteristics of welded joints Risk factor, %

Stress-free connection in Z direction

ψzф = -25

Corner joint with symmetrically located seam

ψzф = -10

Joint with intermediate deposited layer

ψzф = -5

Conventional T-joint with fillet welds

ψzф = 0

T-joint with fillet welds with full or partial penetration

ψzф = +3

Joint with corner welds located near the free end of the sheet
 ψzф = +5

Full penetration corner joints

ψzф = +8

Sheet thickness, S , mm, working in the Z direction, ψ z t ψ z t = 0.2 S

The size of the leg of the fillet weld, a , mm, ψ z ш

ψ z ш = 0.3 a

Degree of rigidity of the connection, ψ z f

Low - free shrinkage possible ψ zф = 0

Average - partial shrinkage of the seam and deformation of the structure are possible ψ zж = + 3

High - rigid fixation without seam shrinkage ψ zж = + 5

Welding technology, ψ z with

Number of passes One ψ zс = 0

Some ψ z с = -2

Sequence of suturing Alternately from one side of the connection to the other ψ z с = -2

First from one side, then from the other side of the connection ψ zс = 0

Heating Without heating ψ zс = 0

With heating ψ z с = -8

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

14 Design of steel structure connections

14.1 Welded joints

14.1.1 When designing steel structures with welded joints, the following should be observed:

assign the dimensions of welded seams taking into account the requirements of 14.1.2 , 14.1.4 - 14.1.6 , and also use the minimum required number
of calculated and structural welded seams;

ensure free access to the places where welded joints are made, taking into account the selected type and technology of welding.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

14.1.2 The main types, structural elements and dimensions of welded joints should be adopted in accordance with current regulatory documents.
14.1.3 When selecting electrodes, welding wire and fluxes, the design groups and design temperatures specified in Appendices B and D should be
taken into account .

14.1.4 When designing welded joints, the possibility of brittle fracture of structures should be excluded in accordance with the requirements of
Section 13 .

14.1.5 When designing T-shaped and corner welded joints of elements of steel structures with tensile stresses in the direction of the rolled product
thickness, in order to eliminate the possibility of layered destruction of the metal under the weld seam, the following should be done:

use steels for structures of group 1 according to Appendix B with guaranteed mechanical properties in the direction of rolled thickness in accordance
with 13.5 ;

use welding materials with reduced strength and increased plasticity; welding techniques aimed at reducing residual welding stresses;

stop using one-sided corner welds and switch to two-sided ones;

replace corner joints with T-joints and ensure that the ratio of the overhang width to the thickness of the elements is at least 1;

use edge preparations that reduce the volume of deposited metal.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

14.1.6 Welded butt joints of sheet metal parts should be designed as straight joints with full penetration and with the use of lead-out strips.

In installation conditions, one-sided welding with root backing and welding on the remaining steel backing are used.

14.1.7 The dimensions of fillet welds and the design of the joint must meet the following requirements:

a) the leg of the fillet weld k f must not exceed 1.2 t , where t is the smallest of the thicknesses of the welded elements;

the leg of a weld applied to a rounded edge of a shaped rolled product of thickness t must not exceed 0.9 t ;

b) the leg of the fillet weld k f must meet the calculation requirements and be no less than that specified in Table 38 when ensuring the depth of
penetration in a two-sided T-joint, as well as in lap and corner joints, when ensuring measures that guarantee the absence of defects, including
technological cracks, the leg of the weld (from 5 mm and more) is taken to be less than that specified in Table 38, but no less than 4 mm;

Table 38

Connection type Type of welding Minimum weld leg k f , mm, with the thickness of the thicker of the
welded elements T *, mm

4-5 6 - 10 11 - 16 17 - 22 23 - 32 33 - 40

T-shaped with double-sided corner welds; Manual arc, automatic and 3 4 6 10 12 16

overlap and corner mechanized

Corner and T-shaped with one-sided 3 5 8 12 16 22

corner welds

____________

* Provided that t ≥ 0.6 T , where t is the thickness of the thinner of the welded elements.

Notes

1 In structures made of steel with a yield strength of over 590 N/mm2 , the minimum weld leg should be taken in accordance with the
manufacturing process regulations.

2 For all steels with element thicknesses greater than 40 mm, the minimum weld leg k f should be taken from the calculation.

3 If the thickness of the thinner of the welded elements is t ≤ 0.67, the minimum leg of the weld seam k f should be taken according to calculation,
but not more than 1.2 t .

c) the calculated length of the corner weld must be at least 4 k f and at least 40 mm;

d) the calculated length of the flank weld must be no more than 85 β f k f , with the exception of welds in which the force acts along the entire length
of the weld (here β f is the coefficient taken from Table 39 );
d) the overlap size must be at least five times the thickness of the thinnest of the welded elements;

e) the ratio of the dimensions of the legs of fillet welds should be taken as 1:1; for different thicknesses of the welded elements, welds with unequal
legs are accepted; in this case, the legs adjacent to the thinner or thicker element must satisfy the requirements of 14.1.7 a) or b), respectively;

g) corner welds should be made with a smooth transition to the base metal; in structures erected in areas with design temperatures below minus 45
°C, as well as in cases where a smooth transition ensures an increase in the design fatigue resistance of welded joints.

Table 39

Type of welding with diameter of solid Seam position Coefficient The value of the coefficients β f and β z for normal welding
welding wire d , mm modes and weld legs, mm

3-8 9 - 12 14 - 16 St. 16

Automatic at d = 3 - 5 Into the boat bf 1,1 0,7

bz 1,15 1,0

Bottom bf 1,1 0,9 0,7

bz 1,15 1,05 1,0

Automatic and mechanized at d = 1.4 - 2 Into the boat bf 0,9 0,8 0,7

bz 1,05 1,0

Bottom, horizontal, bf 0,9 0,8 0,7

vertical

bz 1,05 1,0

Manual and mechanized at d < 1.4 or Into the boat bf 0,7

with flux-cored wire

Bottom, horizontal, bz 1,0

vertical, ceiling

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

14.1.8 For corner welds, the dimensions of which are established in accordance with the calculation, welding materials should be used that meet the
following conditions:

R wf > R wz - for mechanized welding;

1,1 R wz ≤ R wf ≤ R wz β z / β f - for manual welding;

R wz < R wf < R wz β z / β f - for automated welding.

( β f and β z are coefficients that depend on the welding technology and the weld leg and are determined according to Table 39 ).

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

14.1.9 One-sided corner welds in T-joints of elements should be used in structures of normal and low responsibility levels according to the
classification of GOST 27751 , operated in a non-aggressive or slightly aggressive environment (classification according to SP 28.13330 ) in heated
premises:

for attaching intermediate stiffening ribs and diaphragms;

for belt seams of welded I-beams - in structures of groups 2 and 3 (except for beams with conditional flexibility of the wall ) with a
wall thickness t w in columns and posts up to 12 mm and in beams up to 10 mm; in this case, the requirements of 15.3.3 and 15.5.5 must be met ;
for all structural elements - in structures of group 4.

One-sided corner welds should not be used in the construction of buildings and structures:

class KS-3 ( GOST 27751 );

constructed in areas with seismicity of 8 points or higher;

in areas with estimated temperatures below minus 45 °C;

in structures of groups 1, 2, 3 in buildings with cranes of operating modes 7K (in metallurgical production shops) and 8K according to the
classification of SP 20.13330 ;

in beams and crossbars of frame structures, calculated in accordance with the requirements of 8.2.3 , 8.2.6 and 8.2.7 .

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

14.1.10 Intermittent fillet welds under static load and excess load-bearing capacity of a continuous weld of minimum size should be used: for
connections in group 4 structures; in reconstructed group 3 structures in all areas (except those with a design temperature below minus 45 °C);
operated in non-aggressive or slightly aggressive environments.

The dimensions of the weld seam must comply with the requirements of 14.1.7 .

The distance s between sections of welded seams (Figure 19) should not exceed one of the values: 200 mm, 12 t min in a compressed element ( t min
is the thickness of the thinnest of the connected elements), 16 t min in a stretched element. In group 4 structures, the distance s is increased by 50%.

a - in an overlap joint; b - in a T-joint

Figure 19 - Schematic diagram of intermittent fillet welds

When applying an intermittent seam, a seam should be provided at the ends of the connected parts of the elements; the length l w 1 of this seam in
elements of a composite section made of plates should be no less than 0.75 b , where b is the width of the narrower of the connected plates.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

14.1.11 Fillet welds located along the perimeter of openings or slots should be used in lapped joints in the cases provided for in 14.1.10 to transfer
forces in the plane of the lap, to prevent loss of stability of the lap elements or structural connections of the elements.

14.1.12 Plug welds that fill the entire area of ​round or slotted holes with deposited metal should be used in lap joints in the cases provided for in
14.1.10 only to prevent loss of stability of the lap elements or for structural connections of elements.

The thickness of the plug seam must be: not less than the thickness t of the drilled or cut element, but not more than 16 mm; not less than 0.1 of the
slot length or the values ​0.45 d or 0.45 b (where d and b are the diameter of the hole and the width of the slot, equal to d ≥ t + 8 mm and b ≥ t + 8
mm).

The distance between the centers of the holes or the longitudinal axes of the slots must be at least 4 d or 4 b .

14.1.13 Combined joints in which part of the shear force is supported by a friction joint and part by welded seams are used provided that welding is
performed after tightening the bolts to the design force and with subsequent tightening if necessary.

The distribution of force between friction and welded joints should be taken proportionally to their load-bearing capacity. The use of bolts without
controlled tension in combined joints, as well as the use of shear joints, is not permitted.

14.1.14 The calculation of welded butt joints under the action of an axial force N passing through the center of gravity of the joint should be performed
according to the formula
 N /( tl w R wy γ c ) ≤ 1, (175)

where t is the smallest thickness of the elements being connected;

l w - the calculated length of the weld, equal to its full length minus 2 t , or its full length if the ends of the weld extend beyond the joint.

When calculating welded butt joints of elements made of steel with a ratio of R u / γ u > R y , the use of which is possible even after the metal has
reached the yield point, as well as made of steel with a yield point of R y n > 440 N/mm 2 in formula ( 175 ) , R wu / γ u should be taken instead of R wy
.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

14.1.15 Welded butt joints made in the absence of continuous quality control using non-destructive methods, with the simultaneous action in the
same section of the weld of normal σ wx and σ wy and tangential τ wxy stresses, should be checked using formula ( 44 ), taking into account

σx = σwx, σy = σwy, τxy = τwxy, Ry = Rwy.

14.1.16 The calculation of a welded joint with fillet welds, under the action of force N passing through the center of gravity of the joint, should be
performed for shear (conditional) along one of two sections (Figure 20) using the formulas:

(176)

(177)

where l w is the calculated length of the seams in a welded joint, equal to the total length of all its sections minus 1 cm for each continuous section of
the seam;

β f , β z - coefficients taken from Table 39 .

1 - by weld metal; 2 - by fusion boundary metal

Figure 20 - Calculation diagram of the welded joint with a fillet weld

14.1.17 The calculation of welded joints with fillet welds under the action of moment M in a plane perpendicular to the plane of the welds should be
performed for shear (conditional) along one of two sections (see Figure 20 ) using the formulas:

on weld metal

M/(WfRwfγc) ≤ 1; (178)

by metal fusion boundaries

M/(WzRwzγc) ≤ 1, (179)

where W f and W z are the moments of resistance of the calculated sections of the welded joint for the weld metal and for the fusion boundary metal,
respectively.

14.1.18 The calculation of a welded joint with fillet welds under the action of moment M in the plane of location of these welds should be performed
for shear (conditional) along one of two sections (see Figure 20 ) using the formulas:
on weld metal

(180)

by metal fusion boundaries

(181)

where x and y are the coordinates of the point of the welded joint that is most distant from the center of gravity O of the calculated cross-section of
this joint (Figure 21 );

I fx , I fy - moments of inertia of the calculated cross-section of the welded joint along the weld metal relative to its principal axes x - x and y - y ,
respectively;

I zx , I zy - the same, along the fusion boundary metal.

Figure 21 - Calculation scheme of a welded joint

14.1.19 When calculating a welded joint with fillet welds for the simultaneous action of longitudinal N and transverse V forces and moment M (see
Figure 21 ), the following conditions must be met:

τ f /( R wf γ s ) ≤ 1 and τ z /( R wz γ s ) ≤ 1, (182)

where τ f and τ z are the stresses at the point of the calculated cross-section of the welded joint along the weld metal and along the fusion boundary
metal, respectively, determined by the formula

(183)

14.1.20 When performing overlap joints of elements up to 4 mm thick using a spot weld of through-penetration arc welding, the load-bearing capacity
of one point should be taken as equal to the smaller of two limiting values:

when cutting

N s = 0.28 d 2 R wun ; (184)

when breaking out

N t = βdtR un , (185)
where d is the diameter of the spot weld in the plane of the elements being connected, taken according to current regulatory documents;

β = 1.1 when welding elements of equal thickness;

β = 1.9 when welding elements with different thicknesses that differ by 2 or more times; with a smaller difference in thickness, the value of β should
be taken by interpolation;

t is the smaller of the thicknesses of the elements being welded.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

14.2 Bolted connections

14.2.1 For bolted connections of steel structure elements, bolts should be used in accordance with Tables G.3 - G.7 , G.9 (Appendix G).

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

14.2.2 Bolts should be placed in accordance with the requirements of Table 40 , with minimum distances at joints and nodes, and connecting
structural bolts at maximum distances.

When attaching a corner with one shelf using staggered bolts, the hole furthest from its end should be placed on the mark closest to the butt.

14.2.3 Bolts of accuracy class A should be used for connections in which holes are drilled to the design diameter in assembled elements, or along
templates in individual elements and parts, or drilled or punched to a smaller diameter in individual parts with subsequent reaming to the design
diameter in assembled elements.

Bolts of accuracy class B in multi-bolt connections should be used for structures made of steel with a yield strength of up to 375 N/ mm2 .

In connections where bolts operate primarily in tension, bolts of accuracy class B or high-strength should be used.

14.2.4 Bolts that have sections with different diameters along the length of the unthreaded portion should not be used in connections in which these
bolts operate in shear.

14.2.5 The thread of a bolt that takes up shear force in structural elements, transmission line supports and open switchgear, as well as in connections
with an outer element thickness of up to 8 mm, must be located outside the package of connected elements; in other cases, the thread of the bolt
must not enter the hole more than half the thickness of the outer element on the nut side or more than 5 mm.

14.2.6 Washers should be installed on bolts in accordance with SP 70.13330 .

In design connections with bolts of accuracy classes A and B (except for fastening auxiliary structures), measures should be provided against self-
loosening of nuts. Solutions for the installation of spring washers, second nuts or other methods of securing nuts from self-loosening should be
specified in the working drawings of the KM stage.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

14.2.7 On the beveled surfaces of the parts and elements being connected (inner faces of I-beams and channels), oblique washers should be
installed under the heads of the bolts or nuts.

14.2.8 The diameter of the hole for bolts in rolled elements must comply with note 1 of table 40.

Table 40

Characteristics of distance and yield strength of connected elements Distance when placing bolts

1 Distance between bolt hole centers in any direction:

a) minimum:

at R yn ≤ 375 N/mm 2 2.5 days

at R yn > 375 N/mm 2 3d

b) maximum in the outer rows in the absence of border corners under tension and compression 8 d or 12 t
 c) maximum in the middle rows, as well as in the outer rows in the presence of border corners:

when stretched 16 d or 24 t

under compression 12 days or 18 hours

2 Distance from the center of the bolt hole to the edge of the element

a) minimum along the force:

at R yn ≤ 375 N/mm 2 2d

at R yn > 375 N/mm 2 2.5 days

b) the same, across the force:

with cut edges 1.5 days

with rolled edges 1.2 d

c) maximum 4 d or 8 d

d) minimum in a friction connection at any edge and any direction of force 1.3 d

3 Minimum distance between hole centers along the force for staggered bolts u + 1.5 d

Designations adopted in Table 40:

d - diameter of the bolt hole;

t - thickness of the thinnest outer element;

u - distance across the force between rows of holes.

Notes

1 The diameter of the holes should be taken as follows: for bolts of accuracy class A - d = d b ; for bolts of accuracy class B in the structures of
overhead power line supports, outdoor switchgear and compressor stations - d = d b + 1 mm, in other cases - d = d b + (1; 2 or 3 mm), where d b
is the bolt diameter.

2 In single-bolt connections of lattice elements (braces and struts), except for those constantly working in tension, with an element thickness of up
to 6 mm made of steel with a yield strength of up to 375 N/mm2, the distance from the edge of the element to the center of the hole along the force
is taken as 1.35 d (without tolerance in the manufacture of elements in the direction of reduction, which must be indicated in the design).

3 When placing bolts in a staggered pattern at a distance not less than that specified in position 3, the cross-section of element A should be
determined taking into account its weakening by holes located in one cross-section across the force (not in a zigzag pattern).

14.2.9 The design force that can be supported by one bolt, depending on the type of stress state, should be determined using the formulas:

when cutting

Nbs = RbsAbnsγbγc; (186)

in case of collapse
 Nbp = Rbpdb∑tγbγc; (187)

when stretched

Nbt = RbtAbnγc, (188)

where R bs , R bp , R bt are the calculated resistances of single-bolt connections;

A b and A bn are the gross cross-sectional areas of the bolt rod and the net threaded portion, respectively, taken in accordance with Table G.9 ;

n s is the number of calculated slices of one bolt;

d b - outer diameter of the bolt shank;

∑ t - the smallest total thickness of the connected elements, crushed in one direction;

γ c - coefficient of working conditions, determined according to Table 1 ;

γ b is the coefficient of operating conditions of the bolted connection, determined according to Table 41 and taken to be no more than 1.0.

Table 41

Characteristic Yield strength R yn of steel of connected Values ​of a / d , The value of the
elements, N/mm 2 s/d coefficient γ b

bolted connection stress state

Single bolt, bolt of precision classes A, B Slice - - 1,0

or high-strength

Smytie Up to 285 1,5 ≤ a/d ≤ 2 0,4a/d + 0,2

1,35 ≤ a/d < 1,5 a/d - 0,7

St. 285 to 375 1,5 ≤ a/d ≤ 2 0.5 a / d

1,35 ≤ a/d < 1,5 0.67 a / d - 0.25

St. 375 a/d ≥ 2,5 1,0

Multi-bolt, bolts of precision class A Slice - - 1,0

Smytie Up to 285 1,5 ≤ a/d ≤ 2 0,4a/d + 0,2

2 ≤ s/d ≤ 2,5 0.4 sec / d

St. 285 to 375 1,5 ≤ a/d ≤ 2 0.5 a / d

2 ≤ s/d ≤ 2,5 0,5s/d - 0,25

St. 375 a/d ≥ 2,5 1,0

s/d ≥ 3
 Designations adopted in Table 41:

a - the distance along the force from the edge of the element to the center of the nearest hole;

s - distance along the force between the centers of the holes;

d - diameter of the bolt hole.

Notes

1 To calculate multi-bolt connections for shear and crushing with bolts of accuracy classes B, as well as with high-strength bolts without adjustable
tension for all values ​of the yield strength R yn , the steel of the elements being connected, the values ​of the coefficient γ b should be multiplied by
0.9.

2 To calculate the bearing capacity of a multi-bolt connection, the value of γ b should be taken to be the smaller of those calculated with the
adopted values ​of d , a , s .

14.2.10 When a force N acts on a bolted connection , passing through the center of gravity of the connection, the distribution of this force between
the bolts should be assumed to be uniform. In this case, the number of bolts in the connection should be determined by the formula

n ≥ N / N b ,min , (189)

where N b, min is the smallest of the values ​N bs , N bp and N bt , calculated in accordance with the requirements of 14.2.9 .

In cases where the distance l between the outer bolts along the shear force in a joint exceeds 16 d , the value n in formula ( 189 ) should be
increased by dividing by the coefficient β = 1 - 0.005 ( l / d - 16 ), taken to be no less than 0.75. This requirement is not taken into account when the
force acts along the entire length of the joint (for example, in a chord joint of a beam).

14.2.11 When a moment acts on a bolted connection that causes a shift in the elements being connected, the distribution of forces on the bolts
should be taken in proportion to the distances from the center of gravity of the connection to the bolt in question.

The force in the most loaded bolt N b,max shall not exceed the smaller of the values ​N bs or N bp calculated in accordance with the requirements of
14.2.9 .

14.2.12 When a bolted connection is subject to a force and moment acting in the same plane and causing a shift in the connected elements, the bolts
should be checked for the resultant force. In the most heavily loaded bolt, it should not exceed the smaller of the values ​N bs or N bp calculated in
accordance with the requirements of 14.2.9 .

14.2.13 When a bolted connection is subject to simultaneous forces causing shear and tension of the bolts, the most stressed bolt, in addition to
checking according to formula ( 188 ), should be checked according to formula

(190)

where N s and N t are the forces acting on the bolt, shearing and tensile, respectively;

N bs , N bt - design forces determined in accordance with the requirements of 14.2.9 .

14.2.14 In fastenings of one element to another through gaskets or other intermediate elements, as well as in elements with one-sided lining, the
number of bolts should be increased by 10% compared to the calculation.

When fastening protruding shelves of corners or channels using short pieces, the number of bolts fastening the short piece to this shelf should be
increased by 50% compared to the calculation result.

14.2.15 Foundation (anchor) bolts should be checked in accordance with the requirements of SP 43.13330 .

14.3 Friction joints (on bolts with controlled tension)

14.3.1 Friction joints in which forces are transmitted through friction arising along the contacting surfaces of the elements being connected due to
tensioning of bolts with controlled tension should be used:

in structures made of steel with a yield strength of over 375 N/mm2 and directly subject to moving, vibration and other dynamic loads;

in multi-bolt connections, which are subject to increased requirements regarding limiting deformation.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

14.3.2 In friction connections, bolts, nuts and washers must be used in accordance with the requirements of 5.7 .
Bolts shall be placed in accordance with the requirements of Table 40 .

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

14.3.3 The design force that can be supported by each friction plane of elements tightened by one high-strength bolt should be determined using the
formula

Q bt = R bt A bn μ / γ h , (191)

where R. bt is the calculated tensile strength of the high-strength bolt, determined in accordance with the requirements of 6.5 ;

A bn - the cross-sectional area of ​the bolt along the thread, taken according to Table G.9 (Appendix G);

μ - coefficient of friction, taken from Table 42;

γ h is a coefficient taken from Table 42.

Table 42

Method of processing (cleaning) Coefficient of Coefficient γ h when monitoring the tension of bolts by the tightening torque with a
surfaces to be joined friction μ difference in the nominal diameters of holes and bolts δ , mm, under load

dynamic δ = 3 - 6; dynamic δ = 1;

static δ = 5 - 6 static δ = 1 - 4

1 Shot blasting or shot peening of two 0,58 1,35 1,12

surfaces without preservation

2 Gas flame two surfaces without 0,42 1,35 1,12

preservation

3 Steel brushes of two surfaces 0,35 1,35 1,17

without preservation

4 Without processing 0,25 1,70 1,30

Note - When checking the bolt tension by the nut rotation angle, the γ h values ​should be multiplied by 0.9.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

14.3.4 When a force N acts on a friction connection , causing a shift in the elements being connected and passing through the center of gravity of the
connection, the distribution of this force between the bolts should be assumed to be uniform. In this case, the number of bolts in the connection
should be determined by the formula

n ≥ N /( Q bh кγ b γ c ), (192)

where Q bh is the calculated force determined by formula ( 191 );

k - the number of friction planes of the connected elements;

γ c - coefficient of working conditions, taken from Table 1 ;

γ b is the coefficient of the operating conditions of the friction connection, which depends on the number n of bolts required to withstand the
calculated force and is taken to be equal to:

0.8 for n < 5;

0.9 for 5 ≤ n < 10;

1.0 for n ≥ 10.

14.3.5 When a moment or force and moment act on a friction connection, causing a shift in the elements being connected, the distribution of forces
between the bolts should be taken in accordance with 14.2.11 and 14.2.12 .

14.3.6 When a friction connection is subjected to, in addition to the force N causing shear of the elements being connected, a force F causing tension
in the bolts, the value of the coefficient γ b , determined in accordance with the requirements of 14.3.4 , should be multiplied by the coefficient (1 - N t
/ Р b ), where N t is the tensile force per bolt, Р b is the bolt tension force, taken equal to Р b = R bt A bn .

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

14.3.7 The diameter of the bolt in a friction connection should be taken under the condition ∑ t ≤ 4 d b , where ∑ t is the total thickness of the
connected elements shifted in one direction, d b is the diameter of the bolt.

In friction joints with a large number of bolts, their diameter should be set as large as possible.

14.3.8 The design must indicate the steel grades and mechanical properties of bolts, nuts and washers and the designations of the regulatory
documents according to which they must be supplied, the method of processing the surfaces to be connected, and the axial force P b taken in
accordance with 14.3.6 .

14.3.9 When designing friction connections, it is necessary to ensure free access for installing bolts, tightly tightening the package with bolts and
tightening nuts using torque wrenches, impact wrenches, etc.

14.3.10 For high-strength bolts with increased head and nut sizes and with a difference in the nominal diameters of the hole and bolt of no more than
3 mm, and in structures made of steel with a tensile strength of at least 440 N/mm2 - no more than 4 mm, one washer is installed under the nut.

14.3.11 The strength calculation of the connected elements weakened by holes in the friction connection should be performed taking into account
that half of the force applied to each bolt is transmitted by friction forces. In this case, the weakened sections should be checked: under moving,
vibration and other dynamic loads - by the net cross-sectional area A n ; under static loads - by the gross cross-sectional area A (for A n ≥ 0.85 A ) or
by the conventional area A e f = 1.18 A n (for A n < 0.85 A ).

14.4 Belt connections in composite beams

14.4.1 Welded and friction chord joints of a composite I-beam should be calculated using the formulas in Table 43 .

In the absence of transverse stiffeners for transmitting fixed concentrated loads applied to the upper chord, as well as when applying a fixed
concentrated load to the lower chord, regardless of the presence of stiffeners at the points of load application, the chord connections should be
calculated as for a moving load.

Welded seams made with penetration through the entire wall thickness should be considered to be of equal strength to the wall.

Table 43

Nature of the load Belt connections Formulas for calculating belt connections in composite beams

Motionless Welded T/(nβfkfRwfγc) ≤ 1 (193)

T/(nβzkfRwzγc) ≤ 1 (194)

Friction Ts/(Qbhкγc) ≤ 1 (195)

Movable Welded (double-sided seams) (196)

(197)

Friction (198)
 Designations adopted in Table 43:

T = QS / I - shear force per unit length of the chord caused by the transverse force Q (here S is the static moment of the gross chord of the beam
relative to the central axis);

n is the number of corner welds: for double-sided welds n = 2, for single-sided welds n = 1;

Q bh , k - parameters determined according to 14.3.3 , 14.3.4 ;

V = γ f γ f 1 F n / l ef - pressure from a concentrated load F n per unit length, determined taking into account the requirements of 8.2.2 and 8.3.3 (for
stationary loads γ f 1 = 1);

γ f and γ f 1 - load reliability factors adopted according to SP 20.13330 ;

s - pitch of belt bolts;

α is a coefficient taken as: α = 0.4 for a load along the upper chord of the beam to which the wall is attached, and α = 1.0 in the absence of a wall
attachment or for a load along the lower chord.

14.4.2 In beams with friction chord connections with multi-sheet chord packages, the attachment of each sheet beyond its theoretical break point
should be calculated for half the force that can be supported by the sheet section. The attachment of each sheet in the section between its actual
break point and the break point of the previous sheet should be calculated for the full force that can be supported by the sheet section.

15 Requirements for the design of buildings, structures and constructions

15.1 Distances between expansion joints

Distances l between expansion joints of steel frames of single-story buildings and structures must not exceed the largest values ​l u given in Table 44.

If the distances given in Table 44 are exceeded by more than 5%, and also if the rigidity of the frame is increased by walls or other structures, the
calculation should take into account climatic temperature effects, inelastic deformations of structures and the flexibility of nodes.

Table 44

Characteristic The greatest distance l u , m, at the calculated air

temperature, °C, ( 4.2.3 )

buildings and structures directions t ≥ -45 t < -45

Heated building between expansion along the block (along the length of 230 160
joints the building)

by block width 150 110

from the expansion joint or end of the building to the axis of the 90 60
nearest vertical connection

Unheated building and between expansion along the block (along the length of 200 140
hot shop joints the building)

by block width 120 90

from the expansion joint or end of the building to the axis of the 75 50
nearest vertical connection

Open overpass between expansion joints along the block 130 100

from the expansion joint or end of the building to the axis of the 50 40
nearest vertical connection
 Note - If there are two vertical connections between the expansion joints of a building or structure, the distance between the latter in the axes
should not exceed: for buildings - 40 - 50 m and for open overpasses 25 - 30 m, while for buildings and structures erected at design temperatures t
< minus 45 °C, the smaller of the specified distances should be adopted.

15.2 Trusses and structural roof slabs

15.2.1 The axes of the truss and structure rods must be centered at all nodes. The rods should be centered in welded trusses by the centers of
gravity of the sections (rounded to 5 mm), and in bolted trusses - by the marks of the angles closest to the butt.

If the displacement of the axes of the truss chords when changing the sections does not exceed 1.5% of the height of the chord of the smaller
section, it is not taken into account.

In the presence of eccentricities in nodes, elements of trusses and structures should be calculated taking into account the corresponding bending
moments.

When applying loads outside the truss nodes, the chords must be designed for the combined action of longitudinal forces and bending moments.

15.2.2 When calculating flat trusses, the connections of elements at truss nodes are assumed to be hinged:

when cutting elements from angles or T-shaped sections;

for I-beam, H-shaped and tubular sections of elements, when the ratio of the section height h to the element length l between nodes does not
exceed: 1/15 - for structures operated in areas with design temperatures below minus 45° C; 1/10 - for structures operated in other areas.

When the specified h / l ratios are exceeded , additional bending moments in the elements due to the rigidity of the nodes should be taken into
account.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

15.2.3 The distance between the edges of the lattice and chord elements in welded truss joints with gussets should be no less than a = (6 t - 20) mm,
but no more than 80 mm (here t is the thickness of the gusset, mm).

A gap of at least 50 mm should be left between the ends of the joined elements of the truss belts covered by the overlays.

The flange welds that attach the truss lattice elements to the gussets should extend to the end of the element by at least 20 mm.

15.2.4 In truss nodes with chords made of T-beams, I-beams and single angles, the fastening of the gussets to the chord shelves end-to-end should
be carried out with a weld through the entire thickness of the gusset. In group 1 structures, as well as those operated in areas with design
temperatures below minus 45 °C, the abutment of the nodal gussets to the chords should be carried out in accordance with Appendix K (Table K.1,
position 7).

15.2.5 When calculating truss joints with tubular and I-beam sections and fastening lattice elements directly to the chord (without gussets) in
accordance with the design rules, the bearing capacity should be checked:

belt walls with local bending (pushing) at the points where the lattice elements are connected - for round and rectangular pipes;

the side wall of the belt at the junction of the compressed element of the lattice - for rectangular pipes;

flange of the belt for bending - for I-section;

Belt walls - for I-section;

lattice elements in the section adjacent to the belt;

welded seams attaching the lattice elements to the belt.

In addition, the requirements for preventing layered destruction of truss chords ( 13.5 ) must be observed.

15.2.6 For roof truss spans over 36 m, a construction lift equal to the deflection from permanent and long-term standard loads should be provided.
For flat roofs, the construction lift should be provided regardless of the span size, taking it to be equal to the deflection from the total standard load
plus 1/200 of the span.

15.2.7 Trusses with a downward supporting diagonal should be used in buildings and structures of class KS-3 (according to GOST 27751 ) with
spans of no more than 30 m and a height to the bottom of the structure of up to 18 m. In buildings with trusses with a downward supporting diagonal
of classes KS-3 and KS-2 (according to GOST 27751 ), crane equipment must have an operating mode of 1K - 6K (according to SP 20.13330 ), and
its lifting capacity must not exceed 50 tons, and that of suspended equipment - no more than 5 tons.

(Added additionally. Amendment No. 2 )

15.3 Columns
15.3.1 The starting elements of through columns with gratings in two planes should be reinforced with diaphragms located at the ends of the starting
element.

In through columns with a connecting grid in one plane, diaphragms should be located no less than every 4 m.

15.3.2 In columns and posts with one-sided flange seams in accordance with 14.1.9, in the attachment points of ties, beams, struts and other
elements in the force transfer zone, two-sided flange seams should be used that extend beyond the contours of the attached element (node) by a
length of 30 k f on each side.

15.3.3 Corner joints that attach the gussets of the connecting lattice to the columns with an overlap should be assigned according to the calculation
and placed on both sides of the gusset along the column in the form of separate sections in a staggered pattern; in this case, the distance between
the ends of such joints should not exceed 15 thicknesses of the gusset.

In structures erected in areas with design temperatures below minus 45 °C, as well as when using manual arc welding, corner welds must be
continuous along the entire length of the fitting.

15.3.4 Assembly joints of columns should be made with milled ends, butt-welded, on overlays with welded seams or bolted connections, including
friction ones. When welding overlays, welds should not be brought to the joint by 25 mm on each side. When designing connections similar to flanged
ones, the requirements of 15.9 should be taken into account .

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

15 .3.5 In through columns, the branches of which are connected by planks, the following should be adopted:

width b s of intermediate planks - from 0.5 b to 0.75 b (here b is the overall width of the column in the plane of the planks);

the width of the end strips is from 1.3 b s to 1.7 b s .

15.4 Connections
15.4.1 In each temperature block of the building, an independent system of connections should be provided, uniting flat elements into a spatial
system capable of withstanding loads acting on the structure in any direction, as well as bracing and ensuring the stability of the elements, reducing
the calculated lengths of the elements of the upper chords of beams (trusses), columns and other frame elements.

When designing structures in seismic areas, the frame connection system must comply with the requirements of SP 14.13330.2018 (clause 6.9).

When designing structures on undermining areas and subsidence soils, as well as as constructive anti-karst measures, it is necessary to be guided
by the relevant regulatory documents.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

15.4.2 The lower chords of beams and trusses of crane tracks with a span of over 12 m should be reinforced with horizontal ties.

15.4.3 For buildings with crane runway beams, vertical ties between the main columns are located at two levels in height. Below the level of the crane
runway beams, the ties should be located in the middle or near the middle of the temperature block; ties above the level of the crane runway beams
are located at the ends of the building and in the steps of the columns adjacent to the expansion joints, as well as in those steps where the lower-
level ties are located.

If the rigidity of the column branches in the longitudinal direction of the building is insufficient, additional struts should be installed, secured in the
connection nodes.

In case of two-branch columns, if the distance between the branches is more than 500 mm, the vertical ties should be located in the plane of each of
the column branches. The branches of the two-branch ties should be connected to each other with lattices.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

15.4.4 The roof tie system depends on: the type of frame (steel or mixed); the design features of the roof trusses; the presence of purlin trusses, half-
timbered columns and their fastening to the supporting elements of the frame; the type of roof (purlin or non-purlin); the presence or absence of a
rigid roof disk; the presence of overhead lifting and transport equipment; the lifting capacity of cranes and their operating mode.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

15.4.5 In buildings with purlins, at the level of the lower chords of rafter trusses with ascending diagonals resting on the columns with lower chords,
transverse and longitudinal horizontal connections should be provided:

transverse horizontal ties should be provided in each span of the building at the ends, as well as at the expansion joints of the building; if the length
of the temperature block is more than 144 m and for cranes with a lifting capacity of ≥ 50 t, intermediate transverse horizontal ties should be provided
with a step of no more than 60 m.
Longitudinal horizontal ties, which together with transverse ties form a rigid contour in the plane of the lower chords of the trusses, in multi-span
buildings with a steel frame equipped with overhead travelling cranes with a lifting capacity of 10 tons or more, and in buildings with purlin trusses,
should be provided along the outer panels of the lower chords of the rafter trusses; in single-span buildings, longitudinal horizontal ties along the
lower chords of the trusses should be designated along both rows of columns.

In multi-span buildings with cranes with a lifting capacity of ≤ 50 t, with groups of operating modes 1K - 6K (according to SP 20.13330 ), longitudinal
horizontal ties should be located along the outer columns and every other row along the middle columns. In multi-span buildings with cranes with a
lifting capacity of > 50 t, with groups of operating modes 7K - 8K, as well as in buildings with height differences, a more frequent arrangement of
longitudinal ties should be designated along the lower chords of trusses with ascending support diagonals. Longitudinal horizontal ties along the
middle rows of columns with the same height of adjacent spans should be designed the same as along the outer rows of columns.

If the flexibility in the horizontal plane of the panels of the lower chords of the trusses located between two transverse trusses does not satisfy 10.4 ,
then it must be ensured by installing stretchers secured at the nodes of the trusses.

Between rafter trusses with a descending support diagonal, whose lower chord does not rest on columns, in the presence of a fixed rigid disk in the
nodes of the upper chords, in the nodes of the lower chords it is necessary to install spacers coming into vertical ties (installed in tie blocks along the
length of the building in accordance with 15.4.10 ). At the ends of the building with trusses with a descending support diagonal, it is necessary to
install inclined tie elements between the upper chords of the end trusses and the nodes of the lower chords of the second (adjacent) trusses from the
end with spacers coming to them.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

15.4.6 Transverse horizontal ties should be assigned along the upper chords of rafter trusses when covering with purlins in any single-story industrial
building. Transverse tie trusses along the upper and lower chords should be rationally combined in the plan.

Roof purlins with hinged fastening to roof trusses from above cannot be considered as a connecting element or a spacer.

The upper chords of the rafter trusses that are not directly adjacent to the transverse ties should be secured in the plane of the location of these ties
with spacers.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

15.4.7 In the presence of a rigid roof disk at the level of the upper chords of trusses in roofs with a roof slope of no more than 10° without purlins (in
which large-sized reinforced concrete slabs are welded to the upper chords or a profiled roof sheet (according to SP 294.1325800 ) is attached in
each lower corrugation), transverse ties along the upper chords of trusses should be arranged only at the ends of the building and at expansion
joints. In other steps, spacers are required at the ridge and at the supports of the rafter trusses.

In roofs without purlins, horizontal ties along the lower chords of trusses should be installed regardless of the type of roof only in buildings with cranes
with a lifting capacity of ≥ 50 tons, with operating mode groups 7K in metallurgical production shops and 8K (according to SP 20.13330 ).

In the presence of purlin trusses in single-span roofs without purlins and multi-span roofs located at the same level, it is necessary to install
longitudinal horizontal connections in the plane of the upper chords of the trusses in one of the outer panels of the trusses.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

15.4.8 If there is a rigid roof disk in accordance with the requirements of 15.4.7, removable ties should be provided at the level of the upper chords of
the trusses to align the structures and ensure their stability during installation.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

15.4.9 When arranging coverings at different levels, it is necessary to provide one longitudinal system of connections at each level.

Within the lantern, where there are no purlins on the upper chord of the trusses, it is necessary to provide spacers. The presence of such spacers on
the ridge nodes of the trusses is mandatory.

The connections along the lanterns should be located in the plane of the upper belts (beams) at the ends of the lantern and on both sides of the
expansion joints.

(New edition. Amendment No. 2 )

15.4.10 In places where transverse connections of the roof are located, provision should be made for the installation of vertical connections between
the trusses .

In the roofs of buildings and structures operated in areas with design temperatures below minus 45 °C, it is necessary to provide (in addition to those
usually used) vertical ties in the middle of each span along the entire building.

Vertical connections should be located in the planes of the support posts of the rafter trusses, in the planes of the ridge posts for trusses with a span
of up to 30 m, and also in the planes of the posts located under the attachment point of the outer legs of the lantern for trusses with a span of more
than 30 m.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

15.4.11 Horizontal connections along the upper and lower chords of the split trusses of the span structures of conveyor galleries should be provided
separately for each span.

15.4.12 When using a cross lattice of roof ties, with the exception of unique buildings and structures, the calculation is carried out according to a
conditional scheme on the assumption that the diagonals of the lattice of ties only withstand tensile forces.

When determining the forces in the connection elements, the compression of the truss chords should not be taken into account.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

15.4.13 In suspended roofs with flat load-bearing systems (two-belt, bending-rigid cables, etc.), vertical and horizontal connections between the load-
bearing systems should be provided.

15.4.14 Fastening of connections should be carried out using bolts of accuracy class B.

In buildings equipped with heavy-duty cranes and operating modes 7K and 8K, as well as in the case of significant forces in the connection elements
(wind trusses, etc.), the connection elements should be fastened using assembly welding, and in some cases, using bolts of precision class A.

15.4.15 Ties as connection elements should be used in load-bearing structures for buildings and structures of only classes KS-2 and KS-1 (according
to GOST 27751 ), groups of structures 2, 3, 4 (Appendix B ). To create preliminary tension in the ties, special devices should be provided with access
to them and the possibility of tightening during operation.

(Added additionally. Amendment No. 2 )

15.5 Yes
15.5.1 Sheet packs for welded I-beam chords should not be used.

For beam chords with friction joints, it is necessary to use packs consisting of no more than three sheets; in this case, the cross-sectional area of ​the
chord angles should be taken to be equal to at least 30% of the total cross-sectional area of ​the chord.

15.5.2 The flange seams of welded beams, as well as the seams that attach auxiliary elements (e.g. stiffeners) to the main section of the beam,
should be continuous. Transverse stiffeners should have cutouts to allow the flange seams to pass through.

In the beams of frame structures, at the support nodes, double-sided belt seams should be used, the length of which should not be less than the
height of the beam section.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

15.5.3 When using one-sided flange welds in welded I-beams of class 1 bearing a static load, the following requirements must be met:

the design load must be applied symmetrically relative to the beam cross-section;

the stability of the compressed beam flange must be ensured in accordance with item a) 8.4.4 ;

the calculation of the stability of the beam walls must be carried out in accordance with the requirements of 8.5.1 and 8.5.2 ;

transverse stiffeners must be installed at the points where concentrated loads are applied to the beam flange, including loads from ribbed reinforced
concrete slabs; transverse stiffeners should not be installed when conducting a local stability check in accordance with 8.2.2 .

15.5.4 The stiffeners of welded beams must be removed from the wall joints by a distance of at least 10 wall thicknesses. At the intersections of the
beam wall butt welds with the longitudinal stiffener, the welds attaching the longitudinal stiffener to the wall should not be extended to the wall butt
weld at the intersections by (6 t - 20) mm.

15.5.5 In welded I-beams of structures of groups 2 - 4, one-sided stiffening ribs are used, located on one side of the beam and welded to the beam
chords.

In beams with one-sided flange seams, the stiffening ribs on the wall should be located on the side opposite to the location of the one-sided flange
seams.

The calculation of the stability of a one-sided stiffener should be carried out in accordance with the requirements of 8.5.9 and 8.5.10 .

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

15.6 Crane track beams

15.6.1 Upper belt welds in crane runway beams for cranes of operating mode groups 7K (in metallurgical production shops) and 8K (according to SP
20.13330 ) should be made with penetration through the entire wall thickness.

15.6.2 Free edges of stretched chords of crane track beams and beams of work platforms that directly bear the load from rolling stock must be rolled,
planed or cut using machine oxygen or plasma-arc cutting.
15.6.3 The dimensions of the stiffeners of the crane runway beams must meet the requirements of 8.5.9 , 8.5.10 and 8.5.17 , while the width of the
protruding part of the double-sided intermediate rib must be at least 90 mm. Double-sided transverse stiffeners should not be welded to the beam
chords; in this case, the ends of the stiffeners must fit tightly to the upper chord of the beam. In beams for cranes of operating mode groups 7K and
8K (according to SP 20.13330 ), it is necessary to plan the ends adjacent to the upper chord.

The use of one-sided transverse stiffeners made of strip steel or single angles with their welding to the wall and to the upper chord and placement in
accordance with 15.5.5 should only be used in beams for cranes of operating mode groups 1K - 5K (according to SP 20.13330 ).

15.7 Sheet structures

15.7.1 The contour of the transverse stiffening elements of the shells should be designed as closed.

15.7.2 The transfer of concentrated loads to sheet structures should be provided through stiffening elements.

15.7.3 In places where shells of different shapes are joined, smooth transitions should be used to reduce local stresses.

15.7.4 All butt welds should be performed using double-sided or single-sided welding with root backing or on backing plates.

The design should indicate the need to ensure the density of connections of structures in which this density is required.

15.7.5 In sheet structures, butt welded joints should be used; for sheets 5 mm thick or less, overlap welds should be used.

15.8 Hanging coverings

15.8.1 For structures made of threads, ropes, strands and high-strength wire (or rolled products) should be used.

15.8.2 The roof of a suspended covering must be located directly on the supporting threads and repeat the shape formed by them. If the shape of the
roof differs from the shape of the sagging threads, the roof is raised above the threads, supported by a special superstructure, or suspended from the
threads from below.

15.8.3 The outlines of the support contours should be assigned taking into account the pressure curves from the forces in the threads attached to
them under the calculated loads.

15.8.4 In order to maintain the stability of the shape, which should ensure the tightness of the adopted roof structure, hanging coverings should be
designed for the action of temporary loads, including wind suction. In this case, it is necessary to check the change in the curvature of the covering in
two directions - along and across the threads. The necessary stability is achieved using design measures: increasing the tension of the thread due to
the weight of the covering or pre-stressing; creating a special stabilizing structure; using bending-rigid threads; turning the system of threads and
roofing slabs into a single structure.

15.8.5 The thread cross-section must be unfastened according to the greatest force arising under the design load, taking into account the change in
the specified geometry of the coating. In mesh systems, in addition, the thread cross-section must be checked for the force from the action of a
temporary load located only along the given thread.

15.8.6 Vertical and horizontal movements of threads and the forces in them should be determined taking into account the nonlinearity of the operation
of the coating structures.

15.8.7 When calculating the threads from ropes and their fastenings, the working conditions factors should be taken in accordance with Section 17.
For stabilizing ropes, if they are not ties for the support contour, the working conditions factor γ c = 1.

15.8.8 The support units of the threads from rolled sections should be made articulated.

15.9 Flanged connections

(Subsection 15.9 new edition. Amendment No. 2 )

15.9.1 A flange joint (FJ) of steel building structures shall be considered a joint in which there is at least one flat part of a rectangular, round or other
shape (flange), connected to the end of one of the elements by welding, with holes for bolts or studs.

The transfer of forces in the FS (longitudinal forces, bending moments and transverse forces) is carried out through the flange.

(New edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

15.9.2 FS are used in assembly joints of trusses and spatial structures with elements of various shapes, transmission line supports, tower and
antenna-mast structures, joints of beams, columns, frame elements of I-beam or box section, in nodes where beams adjoin columns or other beams.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

15.9.3 FS are classified according to the following characteristics.

I - according to working conditions:

a) FS structures of group 1;

b) FS of structures of groups 2 and 3;

c) FS of structures of group 4.

The group of structures is determined according to 4.3.1 and Appendix B.

II - according to the acting stresses in the near-flange zone (Figure 21a):

a) with a single-valued diagram of compressive normal stresses (compressed FS);

b) with a single-valued diagram of tensile normal stresses (tensile FS);

c) with a two-digit diagram of normal stresses (compressed-bent or bending-stretched FS).

1 - near-flange area; 2 - bolts

Figure 21a - Classification of FS by effective stresses

in the near-flange zone

III - by preliminary tension of bolts in FS:

a) without pre-tensioning the bolts;

b) with preliminary tension of bolts.

IV - by the method of transferring transverse forces to the FS through:

a) bolts, including shear bolts;

b) friction forces through contacting surfaces in compressed areas of the FS;

c) special anti-shear stops (support tables, ribs, etc.)

In the absence of transverse force, the FS is not classified according to feature IV.

(Added additionally. Amendment No. 2 )

15.9.4 Based on the calculations in the design documentation, the FS should be classified in accordance with 15.9.3 for all characteristics.

(Added additionally. Amendment No. 2 )

15.9.5 Flanged connections of structures of group 1 (I, a) should be designed only on bolts with pre-tensioning (III, b);

structures of group 2 and 3 (I, b) - taking into account the provisions of 15.9.6 - 15.9.13 ;

structures of group 4 (I, c) - according to 14.2 made of steel (section 5 ) without taking into account additional requirements for relative narrowing in
the direction of rolled product thickness.

(Added additionally. Amendment No. 2 )

15.9.6 Flanged joints subject to compression or the combined action of compression and bending (II, a) should be designed and calculated in
accordance with 14.2 . When transmitting transverse forces through friction surfaces (III, b + IV, b), the provisions of 14.3 are taken into account .

15.9.7 Flanged connections classified as II, b and II, c should be calculated using a spatial diagram of the plate operation using proven methods, or
by the finite element method taking into account the geometric and physical nonlinearity of the connection operation, or by the limit equilibrium
method in accordance with current regulatory documents.

In the presence of initial imperfections of the FS in the form of mushrooming, the used calculation models of the FS must take into account that the
bolts operate in tension and bending, which occurs when the mushroom-shaped flanges are deformed under load or due to the lack of parallelism of
the supporting surfaces of the bolt head and nut, which occurs when the mushroom-shaped flanges are milled.
(Added additionally. Amendment No. 2 )

15.9.8 When designing a FS, the following should be checked:

a) the strength and local stability of the connected elements in the near-flange zone;

b) the load-bearing capacity of the welded seams of the flange fastening to the structural elements in accordance with the requirements of 14.1 ;

c) the strength of the flange in the tensile zone of the FS, classified as II, b and II, c;

d) the bearing capacity of bolts in the tension zone of the FS, classified as II, b and II, c;

d) shear bearing capacity: for FS III, b + IV, b - in accordance with the requirements of 14.3 ; for FS III, a + IV, a - in accordance with the requirements
of 14.2 ; for FS IV, c - the shear bearing capacity of a special stop (support table, rib, etc.).

(Added additionally. Amendment No. 2 )

15.9.9 For FS II, b and II, c, the beam-to-column flange joint, in addition to the requirements of 15.9.8 , should be checked for:

a) the strength and local stability of the column shelf;

b) the strength and local stability of the column wall (including from the combined action of longitudinal forces, moments, and shear forces in the
column).

(Added additionally. Amendment No. 2 )

15.9.10 When designing FS for flanges, steel should be used in accordance with Section 5 and Appendix B; for FS classified as II, b and II, c - steel
with additional requirements for relative narrowing for samples in the direction of rolled thickness of at least 35%, taking into account the provisions of
13.3 and 13.5 .

(Added additionally. Amendment No. 2 )

15.9.11 When designing FS II, b + III, b + IV, b and II, c + III, b + IV, b, bolts of strength classes 8.8, 10.9, 12.9 and corresponding nuts and washers
should be used. For other FS, bolts should be selected according to 5.6 and 14.2 .

Holes and bolts shall be located in accordance with the requirements of Table 40 .

The nuts of bolts installed without preliminary tension (FS III, b) must be secured against loosening with locknuts, spring washers, etc.

(Added additionally. Amendment No. 2 )

15.9.12 Requirements for bolt tension and for monitoring the density of contact between flange surfaces for FS III, b + IV, b are given in SP 70.13330
.

(Added additionally. Amendment No. 2 )

15.9.13 Acceptance into operation of the FS in the presence of initial imperfections in the form of mushrooming should be carried out after receiving
positive results from additional calculations.

Calculation of FS III, a + IV, a with non-flat flanges (in the presence of gaps between the contact surfaces) is performed as for connections with flat
flanges (see 15.9.5 - 15.9.9 ) without gaps, taking the design resistance of a single-bolt connection R bt = 0.54 R bun , regardless of the strength class
of the bolts, and the coefficient of flange service conditions γ c = 1.4. In this case, the gaps between the connected elements with non-flat flanges
must satisfy the following requirements:

a) gaps in the washer area - no more than 1.2 mm inclusive;

b) edge gaps along the flange perimeter - no more than 4 mm inclusive;

c) gaps between flanges along the central lines of compressed shelves and compressed wall zones - no more than 0.1 mm; along the central lines of
stretched shelves and stretched wall zones - no more than 1.2 mm.

(Added additionally. Amendment No. 2 )

15.10 Connections with milled ends

In connections of elements with milled ends (at joints and bases of columns, etc.), the compressive force should be considered to be completely
transmitted through the ends.

In eccentrically compressed (compressed-bending) elements, welded seams and bolts, including high-strength ones, of the specified connections
should be calculated for the maximum tensile force from the action of a moment and longitudinal force under their most unfavourable combination, as
well as for the shear force from the action of a transverse force.
15.11 Mounting fasteners
15.11.1 Mounting fastenings of building structures and structures with crane track beams designed for fatigue, as well as structures for railway trains,
must be welded or frictional.

In the assembly connections of these structures, bolts of accuracy class B should be used:

for fastening purlins, elements of lantern structures, ties along the upper chords of trusses (if there are ties along the lower chords or a rigid roof),
vertical ties along trusses and lanterns, as well as half-timbering elements;

for fastening connections along the lower chords of trusses in the presence of a rigid roof (welded to the upper chords of reinforced concrete or
cellular concrete slabs or attached to each wave of profiled sheeting, etc.);

for fastening rafter and sub-rafter trusses to columns and rafter trusses to sub-rafter trusses, provided that the vertical support pressure is transferred
through the table;

for fastening split beams of crane tracks to each other, as well as for fastening their lower chord to columns to which vertical ties are not attached;

for fastening beams of work platforms that are not subject to dynamic loads;

for fastening secondary structures.

15.11.2 To redistribute bending moments in elements of frame systems of frame buildings, steel plates operating in the plastic stage are used at the
joints of beams with columns. Plates should be made of steels with a yield strength of up to 345 N/mm 2 .

The forces in the linings should be determined at the minimum yield strength σ y, min = R yn and the maximum yield strength σ y, max = R yn + 100
N/mm 2 .

The longitudinal edges of the overlays operating in the plastic stage must be planed or milled.

15.12 Support parts

15.12.1 Fixed hinged supports with centering gaskets, tangential, and in the case of very large reactions - balance supports should be used when it is
necessary to strictly uniformly distribute the pressure under the support.

Flat or roller movable supports should be used in cases where the underlying structure must be relieved from horizontal forces arising from fixed
support of a beam or truss.

The coefficient of friction in flat movable supports should be taken as 0.3, in roller supports - 0.03.

15.12.2 Calculation of crushing in cylindrical hinges (trunnions) of balance beam supports should be performed (with a central angle of contact of the
surfaces equal to or greater than 90°) according to the formula

F /(1.25 rlR lp γ c ) ≤ 1, (199)

where F is the pressure (force) on the support;

r , l - radius and length of the hinge, respectively;

R lp - calculated resistance to local crushing under close contact, adopted in accordance with the requirements of 6.1 .

15.12.3 Calculation of the diametrical compression of the rollers should be performed according to the formula

F/(ndlRcdγc) ≤ 1, (200)

where n is the number of rollers;

d , l - diameter and length of the roller, respectively;

R cd is the calculated resistance to diametrical compression of rollers under free contact, adopted in accordance with the requirements of 6.1 .

16 Requirements for the design of structures of supports for overhead power

transmission lines, open switchgear and transport contact networks
16.1 For the structures and connections of supports for overhead power transmission lines (OPT), open switchgear units (OSG) and transport contact
networks (TCN ) , materials should be used in accordance with the requirements of Section 5 and Appendix B.
16.1a Depending on the purpose and type of their connections, support structures are divided into groups:

group 1 - welded special supports for large crossings over 60 m high;

group 2 - welded supports for overhead power lines, except for those specified in group 1; welded supports for busbars and for switches of outdoor
switchgear regardless of voltage, welded supports for equipment of outdoor switchgear with voltage over 330 kV; structures and elements of cable
systems associated with tensioning of wires (traction, rod, clamps), as well as supports specified in group 1, in the absence of welded joints;

group 3 - welded and bolted supports for switchgear equipment with voltage up to 330 kV, except for supports for circuit breakers; structures and
elements of load-bearing, supporting and fixing devices of the switchgear system (supports, crossbars of rigid crossbars, floodlight masts, fixators),
as well as structures of group 2, except for the switchgear system, in the absence of welded joints;

Group 4 - welded and bolted structures of cable channels, parts of transformer rolling paths, ladders, stairs, fences and other auxiliary structures and
elements of outdoor switchgear, overhead lines and cable networks.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

16.2 Bolts of accuracy classes A and B for transmission line supports up to 60 m high and switchgear and controlgear structures should be accepted
as for structures not designed for fatigue, and for flange connections and transmission line supports over 60 m high - as for structures designed for
fatigue, according to Table G.3 (Appendix G).

Flanged joints without controlled bolt tension are used to connect structures specified in this section, regardless of the stress classification in the
near-flange zone II according to 15.9.3 .

For FS subject to compression (compression with bending), with bolts without controlled tension, bolts, nuts and washers in accordance with 5.6
should be used .

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

16.3 (Excluded. Amendment No. 2 )

16.4 When calculating overhead line supports, switchgear and compressor station structures, the operating condition factors established in 7.1.2 ,
sections 4 and 14 and according to table 45 should be adopted .

For overhead power line supports, outdoor switchgear and compressor stations, the value of the reliability factor for responsibility γ n should be taken
in accordance with the requirements of GOST 27751 .

Calculation of the strength of stretched support elements using formula ( 5 ) with the replacement of the value R y with R u / γ u is not permitted.

Table 45

Element of construction Working conditions coefficient

γ with

1 Compressed belts from single corners of free-standing support posts in the first two panels from the shoe at
nodal connections:

a) on welding 0.95 0,95

b) on bolts 0.90 0,90

2 Compressed element of a flat lattice cross-beam made of a single equal-shelf angle, attached by one shelf
(Figure 22):

a) a belt attached to the support post directly by two or more bolts placed along the crossbar belt 0,90

b) a belt attached to the support post with one bolt or through packaging 0,75

c) diagonal and spacer 0,75

3 Guy rope or bundle of high-strength wire:

 a) for intermediate support in normal operating mode 0,90

b) for anchor, anchor-angle and angle supports:

in normal operation mode 0,80

in emergency mode 0,90

Note - The working condition factors specified in the table do not apply to connections of elements in nodes.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

16.5 When determining the reduced flexibility according to Table 8, the greatest flexibility of the entire rod λ max should be calculated using the
formulas:

for a tetrahedral rod with parallel belts, hinged at the ends,

λmax = 2l/b; (201)

for a triangular equilateral rod with parallel belts, hinged at the ends,

λmax = 2,5l/b; (202)

for a free-standing pyramidal stand (Figure 15 )

λ max = 2 μh / b i , (203)

where l is the geometric length of the through rod;

b - the distance between the axes of the belts of the narrowest edge of the rod with parallel belts;

h - height of a free-standing rack;

μ = 1.25( b s / b i ) 2 - 2.75( b s / b i ) + 3.5 - coefficient for determining the calculated length, where b s and b i are the distances between the axes of
the belts of the pyramidal support at the upper and lower bases of the narrowest face, respectively.

Figure 22 - Diagram of a crossbar with a triangular lattice

16.6 Calculation of the stability under compression with bending of a through rod with lattices of constant cross-section along the length should be
carried out in accordance with Section 9 .

For an equilateral triangular through rod with lattices of constant cross-section along the length, the relative eccentricity should be calculated using
the formulas:

when bending in a plane perpendicular to one of the faces,

 m = 3,46βM/(Nb); (204)

when bending in a plane parallel to one of the faces,

m = 3βM/(Nb), (205)

where b is the distance between the axes of the belts in the plane of the face;

β is a coefficient equal to 1.2 for bolted connections and 1.0 for welded connections.

16.7 When calculating the stability under compression with bending of a through rod with lattices according to 9.3.1 and 9.3.2, the value of
eccentricity e for bolted connections of elements should be multiplied by a coefficient of 1.2.

16.8 When checking the stability of individual chords of a through-section support rod with braces under compression with bending, the longitudinal
force in each chord should be determined taking into account the additional force from the bending moment M , calculated according to the deformed
scheme.

For a lattice rack with a constant length rectangular cross-section (type 2, table 8 ) hinged at the ends of a support with braces, the value of the
moment M in the middle of the rack length when it bends in one of the planes x - x or y - y should be determined using the formula

M = Mq + (βN/δ)(fq + fn), (206)

where M q is the bending moment at the middle of the length of the rack from the transverse load, determined as in beams;

β is a coefficient adopted in accordance with 16.6 ;

N - longitudinal force in the rack;

f q - deflection of the rack at the middle of the length from the transverse load, determined as in ordinary beams using the reduced moment of inertia
of the section I ef ;

f n = 0.0013 l - initial deflection of the rack in the bending plane;

δ = 1 - 0.1 Nl 2 /( EI e f ).

Here: l is the length of the rack; I e f = Аl 2 / λ ef 2 ,

where A is the cross-sectional area of ​the rack;

λ ef is the reduced flexibility of the rack, determined according to Table 8 for a type 2 section with the replacement in formula ( 16 ) of λ max by λ x or λ
y , respectively, of the bending plane.

When bending a rack in two planes, the force should be determined using formula ( 124 ); in this case, the initial deflection f n should be taken into
account only in the plane in which the component of the force from the moment M x or M y has the greatest value.

16.9 The transverse force Q in a rack with lattices of constant length and a rectangular cross-section (type 2, table 8 ) hinged at the ends of a support
with braces under compression with bending in one of the planes x - x or y - y should be taken as constant along the length of the rack and
determined by the formula

(207)

where Q max is the maximum transverse force from the transverse load in the bending plane, defined as in beams.

The remaining designations in formula ( 207 ) should be taken as the same as in formula ( 206 ).

16.10 For a lattice rack with a constant length triangular through section (type 3, table 8 ) with hinged ends and guy wires, under compression with
bending in one of the planes x - x or y - y , the value of the moment M in the middle of its length should be determined using formula ( 206 ), and the
reduced flexibility should be determined using table 8 for a type 3 section.

When bending a rack in two planes, the value of the force should be taken as the larger of the two values ​determined by the formula

N ad = 1.16 M x / b or = 0.58 M x ​/ b + M y / b . (208)

When taking into account both moments M x and M y in the second formula ( 208 ), the initial deflection of the rack f n in each of the two planes
should be taken as equal to 0.001 l .

16.11 The transverse force Q in the plane of the face of a lattice support of a triangular through section with guy wires, hinged at the ends, under
compression with bending should be determined using formula ( 207 ), taking into account the reduced flexibility λ ef , determined using Table 8 for
section type 3.

16.12 The calculation of the stability of compressed structural elements made of single angles (belts, lattice) should be performed taking into account
the eccentric application of longitudinal force.

As centrally compressed according to formula ( 7 ), these elements should be calculated under the condition of multiplying the longitudinal forces by
the coefficients α m and α d taken to be no less than 1.0.

In spatial bolted structures according to Figure 15 (except for Figure 15 , c) and end supports) when centering in a node elements of single equal-
flange angles according to their risks with a single-row arrangement of bolts in the lattice elements and attachment of diagonals in a node on both
sides of the flange of the chord, the values ​of the coefficients α m and α d should be determined:

for belts with ≤ 3.5 (with > 3.5 it should be taken = 3.5) according to the formulas:

at 0.55 ≤ c / b ≤ 0.66 and N md / N m ≤ 0.7

αm = 1 + [c/b - 0,55 + (0,2 - 0,05 )]Nmd/Nm; (209)

при 0,4 ≤ c/b < 0,55 и Nmd/Nm ≤ (2,33c/b - 0,58)

αm = 0,95 + 0,1c/b + [0,34 - 0,62c/b + (0,2 - 0,05 )]Nmd/Nm; (210)

for diagonals adjacent to the calculated belt panel, according to the formulas:

при 0,55 ≤ c/b ≤ 0,66 и Nmd/Nm < 0,7

αd = 1,18 - 0,36c/b + (1,8c/b - 0,86)Nmd/Nm; (211)

при 0,4 ≤ c/b < 0,55 и Nmd/Nm ≤ (2,33c/b - 0,58)

αd = 1 - 0,04c/b + (0,36 - 0,41c/b)Nmd/Nm. (212)

For spatial bolted structures according to Figure 15 , g), d) in formulas ( 210 ) and ( 212 ) it should be taken as 0.45 ≤ c / b < 0.55.

In formulas ( 211 ) and ( 212 ), the ratio of the distance along the shelf of the diagonal angle from the butt to the mark on which the bolts are installed
to the width of the shelf of the diagonal angle is taken to be from 0.54 to 0.6; with a ratio equal to 0.5, the coefficient α d , calculated using formulas (
211 ) and ( 212 ), should be increased by 5%.

In spatial welded structures made of single equal-flange angles according to Figure 15 , b), d) (except for end supports) with the attachment of
diagonals in the joint only on the inner side of the flange of the chord at N md / N m ≤ 0.7, the values ​of the coefficients α m and α d should be taken as:

when centering in the nodes of elements according to the centers of gravity of sections

αm = αd = 1,0;

when centering in the nodes of the diagonal axes on the belt shank

αm = αd = 1,0 + 0,12Nmd/Nm.

When calculating structures for the combined action of vertical and transverse loads and torque caused by the breakage of wires or cables, α m = α d
= 1.0 is taken.

Designations adopted in formulas ( 209 ) - ( 212 ):

c - the distance along the shelf of the corner of the belt from the butt to the mark on which the center of the knot is located;

b - width of the shelf of the belt corner;

N m - longitudinal force in the belt panel;

N md is the sum of the projections onto the axis of the chord of the forces in the diagonals adjacent to one flange of the chord, transmitted to it in a
node and determined for the same combination of loads as for N m ; when calculating the chord, the greater of the N md values ​obtained for the nodes
at the ends of the panel should be taken , and when calculating the diagonals - for the node to which the diagonal is adjacent.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

16.13 The calculated lengths l ef and the radii of gyration of sections i when determining the flexibility of elements of flat cross-beams with chords and
a lattice of single angles (see Figure 22) should be taken as equal to:

for belt l ef = l m , i = i min l ef = l m 1 , i = i x ;

for brace l ef = l d , i = i min ;

for the spacer l ef = l c , i = i min ,

where i x is the radius of gyration of the section relative to the axis parallel to the plane of the crosshead lattice.

16.14 The flexibility of the first diagonal from the bottom made of a single angle of a free-standing lattice support of an overhead power line must not
exceed 160.

16.15 Deviations of the top of the supports and deflections of the crossbars must not exceed the values ​given in Table 46 .

16.16 In steel spatial structures of overhead power line supports and outdoor switchgear made of single angles, diaphragms should be provided in
the cross-sections, which should be located in the uprights of free-standing supports no less than every 25 m, and in the uprights of supports on guy
wires no less than every 15 m. Diaphragms should also be installed in places where concentrated loads are applied and where belts break.

16.17 When calculating the crushing of connected lattice elements in single-bolt connections with a distance from the edge of the element to the
center of the hole along the force of less than 1.5 d , note 2 to Table 40 should be taken into account .

In single-bolt connections of elements that are constantly under tension (crossbar rods, elements adjacent to wire and cable attachment points, and
in equipment attachment points), the distance from the edge of the element to the center of the hole along the force should be taken to be no less
than 2 d .

16.18 The diagonals, attached to the chord with bolts in one unit, must be located on both sides of the chord angle shelf.

Table 46

Design and direction of deviation Relative deviation of the top of Relative deflection of the cross-beam and beam (to the
the support (to the height of the span or length of the console)
support)

Vertical Horizontal

in flight on the in flight on the

console console

1 End and corner support of the overhead power 1 1 1 Not limited

line of anchor type up to 60 m high along the
wires 120 200 70

2 Anchor-type overhead power line support up to 1 1 1 Same

60 m high along the wires
100 120 70

3 Intermediate support of overhead power lines Not limited 1 1 «

(except transitional) along and across wires
150 50

4 Transitional supports for overhead power lines 1 1 1 «

of all types with a height of over 60 m along the
wires 140 200 70

5 Switchgear support along the wires 1 11 1 1 1

200 70 200 70
 6 The same, across the wires 1 Not limited Not limited Not limited

70

7 Equipment support stand 1 - - - -

100

8 Beam for equipment - 1 1 - -

300 250

Notes

1 The deviation of outdoor switchgear supports and overhead line support crossarms in emergency and installation modes is not standardized.

2 Deviations and deflections in positions 7 and 8 must be reduced if the technical conditions for the operation of the equipment establish more
stringent requirements.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

16.19 In bolted joints of equal-flange chord angles, the number of bolts in the joint should be assigned as even and the bolts should be distributed
equally between the flanges of the angle.

The number of bolts in single-row and staggered arrangement, as well as the number of transverse rows of bolts in double-row arrangement, should
be set at no more than five on one shelf of the corner on each side of the joint.

The specified number of bolts and transverse rows should be increased to seven, provided that the value of the coefficient γ b , determined according
to Table 41 , is reduced by multiplying by 0.85.

16.20 Calculation of the stability of the walls of supports made of polyhedral pipes with the number of faces from 8 to 12 should be performed
according to the formula

σ 1 /( σ cr γ c ) ≤ 1, (213)

where σ 1 is the greatest compressive stress in the support section when it is calculated according to the deformed scheme;

σ cr - critical stress, calculated by the formula

(214)

– conditional flexibility of the wall of the face with width b and thickness t ;

ψ = 1 + 0.033 (1 - σ 2 / σ 1 ),

where no more than 2.4 should be taken;

σ 2 is the minimum stress in the section, taken under tension with a minus sign.

Polygonal pipes shall comply with the requirements of 11.2.1 and 11.2.2 for round pipes with the radius of the circumscribed circle.

17 Requirements for the design of structures of communication antenna structures up to

500 m high
17.1 For steel structures of antenna structures (AS), steels according to Appendix B (except for steels C390K, C590, C590K) should be used, as well
as welded straight-seam and seamless pipes made of steel C245, C255, C345, C355. In this case, the following distribution of structures should be
adopted:
1 - guys made of steel ropes and chains of various configurations, supporting cables of antenna panels and antenna wires; elements (mechanical
parts) of guy wires of masts and antenna panels, parts for fastening guy wires to foundations and to steel support shafts; flanges and flange joints of
mast and tower shaft elements, including support flanges and shoes;

2 - solid-wall and lattice trunks of masts and towers, lattice, diaphragms of trunks of tower supports;

3 - stairs, transition platforms; metal structures for mounting antenna equipment.

Materials for connections should be adopted in accordance with Section 5 , standard and design resistances of materials and connections - in
accordance with Section 6 and Appendices B and G.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

17.2 For guy ropes and antenna web elements, steel round ropes galvanized to group CC, non-twisting single-twist cargo ropes (spiral) or non-
twisting double cross-twist ropes with a metal core (round-strand), should be used, while spiral ropes should be used for design forces of up to 325
kN. Steel round rope wire of the largest diameters of grade 1 should be used in ropes. For medium- and highly aggressive environments, ropes
galvanized to group ZhS should be used, with the requirements for ropes of group CC. When increasing the length of the bindings made of soft
galvanized wire located at the ends of the ropes by 25%, untwisting ropes should be used.

For guy ropes with built-in nut-type insulators, steel ropes with non-metallic cores should be used if this is permitted by radio engineering
requirements.

For guy ropes with forces exceeding the bearing capacity of ropes made of round wire, closed-type steel ropes made of Z-shaped and wedge-shaped
galvanized wires should be used.

17.3 The ends of steel cables in cups or couplings should be secured by filling with zinc alloy TsAM9-1.5L.

17.4 For antenna web elements, wires according to Table B.2 should be used . The use of copper wires is permitted only in cases of technological
necessity.

17.5 The value of the calculated tensile strength (effort) of wires and cables should be taken as equal to the value of the breaking force established
by state standards, divided by the material safety factor γ m ;

for aluminum and copper wires γ m = 2.5;

for steel-aluminum wires with nominal cross-sections, mm2 ;

16 and 25 - γm = 2,8;

35 - 95 - γm = 2,5;

120 and more - γm = 2,2;

for bimetallic steel-copper wires γ m = 2.0.

17.6 When calculating the design of the NPP, the operating condition factors established in 4.3 , Section 14 and Table 47 should be adopted.

Table 47

Elements of construction Working conditions coefficient γ

with

Prestressed lattice elements 0,90

Flange:

ring type 1,10

other types 0,90

Steel guy ropes of masts or elements of antenna panels, if their quantity is:
 3 - 5 guy wires in a tier or antenna web elements 0,80

6 - 8 guy ropes per tier 0,90

9 or more guys in a tier 0,95

Sealing the ends on the thimble with clamps or spot pressing in the bushing 0,75

Rope braiding on a thimble or insulator 0,55

Fastening elements for guy wires, antenna panels, wires, braces to supporting structures and anchor 0,90
foundations

Anchor ties without threaded connections when working in tension with bending 0,65

Eyes when working in tension 0,65

Details of fastenings and connections of steel ropes:

mechanical, except for hinge axes 0,80

hinge axes under compression 0,90

17.7 Relative deviations of supports (to height) must not exceed the values ​(except for deviations of supports for which other values ​are established
by the design specifications):

1/100 - under wind or ice load;

1/300 - with one-sided suspension of the antenna to the support in the absence of wind.

17.8 Assembly joints of structural elements (including flange joints) that transmit design forces should be designed using bolts of accuracy class B
and strength classes 8.8 and 10.9. In the case of alternating forces, connections should be made using bolts of strength classes 8.8 and 10.9 with
mandatory bolt tensioning by force P b (according to 14.3.6 ) or by assembly welding.

High strength bolts should be used in flange connections.

The use of assembly welding or bolts of precision class A must be agreed with the installation organization.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

17.9 Diagonals with a flexibility of more than 250 with a cross lattice at the intersections must be fastened together.

The deflections of diaphragm spacers and elements of process platforms in the vertical and horizontal planes must not exceed 1/250 of the span.

17.10 In lattice support structures, diaphragms must be installed at a distance between them no more than three times the average cross-sectional
area of ​the support section, as well as in places where concentrated loads are applied and where belts break.

17.11 Bolts of flanged pipe connections should be placed on one circle of the minimum possible diameter at equal distances from each other.

17.12 The elements of the truss lattice converging at one node should be centered on the chord axis at the intersection point of their axes. At the
points where the diagonals adjoin the flanges, their misalignment should be no more than a third of the chord cross-section size. If the misalignment
is greater, the elements should be calculated taking into account the nodal moments.

In slotted fittings for fastening diagonals made of round steel, the end of the slot should be drilled with a hole with a diameter 1.2 times larger than the
diameter of the diagonal.

17.13 Guy lines in lattice-type masts should be centered at the intersection of the axes of the chords and struts. The chord should be taken as the
conventional axis of the guy lines.

Sheet lugs for fastening guy ropes must be reinforced with stiffening ribs to prevent them from bending.
The designs of guy wire attachment points that do not fit into the transport dimensions of mast trunk sections should be designed on separate inserts
in the trunk in the form of rigid dimensional diaphragms.

17.14 Tensioning devices (couplings) used to regulate the length and secure the mast guys must be attached to the anchor devices with a flexible
rope insert. The length of the rope insert between the ends of the bushings must be at least 20 rope diameters.

17.15 For AC elements, standard mechanical parts that have passed strength and fatigue tests should be used.

Threads on stretched elements should be adopted in accordance with current regulatory documents (execution of the thread root with rounding).

17.16 In the guy wires of masts, on the wires and cables of horizontal antenna panels, for vibration damping, it is necessary to provide for the
sequential installation of paired low-frequency (1 - 2.5 Hz) and high-frequency (4 - 40 Hz) spring-type vibration dampers. Low-frequency dampers
should be selected depending on the frequency of the fundamental tone of the guy wire or cable. The distance s from the end fitting of the cable to
the place where the dampers are suspended should be determined using the formula

(215)

where d is the diameter of the rope, wire, mm;

m - mass of 1 m of rope, wire, kg;

P - preliminary tension in the rope, wire, N.

High-frequency dampers should be installed above low-frequency ones at a distance of s . When the spans of wires and cables of antenna panels
exceed 300 m, dampers should be installed regardless of the calculation.

To dampen galloping type oscillations, the free length of the rope (wire) should be changed with leashes.

17.17 Radio communication antenna structures must be painted in accordance with the requirements for marking and lighting of high-rise obstacles.

17.18 Mechanical parts of guy wires, insulator fittings, and hardware must be galvanized.

18 Requirements for the design of structures of buildings and structures during

reconstruction

18.1 General Provisions

18.1.1 The residual life of building and structure structures should be assessed based on an analysis of available technical documentation, visual and
instrumental inspections, and verification calculations of the bearing capacity and deformability of structural elements that have defects or have been
damaged during operation. As a result of the inspection, the technical condition of building and structure elements should be determined in
accordance with current regulatory documents as:

normative - in the absence of defects and damage and in compliance with all requirements of the design documentation, current regulations and
national standards;

operational - in the presence of defects and damage of a local nature, which, with subsequent development, cannot affect the load-bearing capacity
of other elements and the structure as a whole, and do not limit the normal operation of the building or structure under specific conditions;

limited functionality - in the presence of defects and damage that do not pose a danger of sudden destruction or loss of stability of structures, but
may subsequently cause damage to other elements and units of structures, or (if damage develops) become hazardous, when, in order to ensure the
operation of a building (structure), it is necessary to monitor the condition of structures, the duration of their operation, the parameters of
technological processes (for example, limiting the lifting capacity of overhead cranes) or reinforcement of structures is required;

emergency - in the presence of defects and damage indicating the exhaustion of the load-bearing capacity of particularly critical elements and
connections, posing a danger of destruction of structures and capable of causing a loss of stability of the object as a whole.

18.1.2 When strengthening or changing the operating conditions of the preserved structures, it is necessary to ensure that they are at least in a
working condition.

During the period from the inspection to the reinforcement, structures that are in a limited operational state must be provided with the necessary
control.

When strengthening structures, it is necessary to provide for design solutions and methods of performing work that ensure the smooth inclusion of
reinforcement elements and structures in joint work with the structures being preserved, including the use of artificial regulation of forces and
temporary unloading of structures.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

18.1.3 For structures designed according to previously valid standards and technical conditions, a verification calculation should not be carried out in
cases where, over a period of operation of at least 15 years, no defects or damage have occurred in them, the conditions of further operation, loads
and impacts have not changed, and when they change, the forces in the main elements have not increased.

18.2 Design characteristics of steel and connections

18.2.1 The quality of the structural material should be assessed based on the data from factory certificates or the results of sample tests. Tests
should be performed in the absence of executive documentation or certificates, insufficient information contained therein, or detection of damage that
could have been caused by the low quality of the metal.

18.2.2 When examining and testing metal, the following indicators should be determined:

chemical composition - mass fraction of elements according to Table B.2 (Appendix B);

yield strength, tensile strength and relative elongation in tensile tests (tests should be carried out with the construction of a steel performance
diagram);

impact strength for temperatures corresponding to the design group and the design temperature according to Table B.1 (Appendix B);

in some cases, the macro- and microstructure of steel (in particular, for structures of the 1st and 2nd groups of Appendix B.

Impact toughness should not be assessed for rimming and Bessemer steels, as well as other carbon steels with a sulfur content S > 0.55% or
phosphorus P > 0.050%.

The sampling locations for determining the listed indicators, the number of samples and the need to reinforce the cutting locations are determined by
the organization conducting the inspection of the structures.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

18.2.3 Research and testing of metal structures manufactured before 1950 should be carried out in specialized research institutes where, in addition
to the properties of the metal, the method of steel production is established: puddling, converter with air blowing (Bessemer or Thomas), open-hearth
or electric steel.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

18.2.4 The design resistances of rolled products, bent sections and pipes of the retained structures should be assigned in accordance with the
requirements of 6.1 , while the values ​of R yn , R un and γ m should be taken as:

for metal structures manufactured before 1950 - according to the minimum values ​of yield strength and ultimate strength obtained during testing, γ m
= 1.2;

R y for puddling steel should be no more than 170 N/mm 2 , for converter, open-hearth and electric steel - no more than 210 N/mm 2 ;

for metal structures manufactured after 1950:

a) if a certificate is available - according to the minimum values ​of the yield strength and ultimate strength established in the regulatory documents
according to which the given metal product was manufactured; γ m = 1.15 - for rolled products manufactured before 1982 ; γ m = 1.1 - for rolled
products manufactured after 1982; γ m = 1.05 - for rolled products manufactured after 1988 according to regulatory documents using a statistical
procedure for monitoring the properties of rolled products;

b) in the absence of a certificate (based on the results of metal research in accordance with 18.2.2 , as well as on information about the type of rolled
product and the construction time, the steel grade and the regulatory document according to which the given metal product was manufactured should
be determined) - based on the minimum values ​of the yield strength and tensile strength established in the regulatory document for the given product,
γ m = 1.15;

c) in cases where it was not possible to identify the steel, according to the minimum test result, γ m = 1.15; R y should not be more than 210 N/mm 2 .

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

18.2.5 The design resistances of welded joints of preserved structures subject to reconstruction or reinforcement should be assigned taking into
account the grade of steel, welding materials, types of welding, position of seams and methods of their control used in the structures.

In the absence of the necessary data established by the standards, the following should be adopted:

for corner welds R wf = R wz = 0.44 R un ; β f = 0.7 and β z = 1.0, considering that γ c = 0.8;

for stretched butt welds R w y = 0.55 R y in structures manufactured before 1972, and R w y = 0.85 R y after 1972. The load-bearing capacity of welded
joints should be clarified based on the results of testing samples taken from the structure.
18.2.6 The design resistance to shear and tension of bolts, as well as to crushing of elements connected by bolts, should be determined in
accordance with 6.5 . If it is impossible to establish the strength class of bolts, then the values ​of the design resistances of single-bolt connections
should be taken as: R b s = 150 N/mm 2 and R b t = N/mm 2 .

18.2.7 The design resistances of riveted joints should be taken from Table 48.

If the executive documentation does not contain any instructions on the method of forming the holes and the material of the rivets and it is not
possible to establish them based on the available data, the design resistances should be taken from Table 48 as for connections with group C rivets
made of grade St 2 steel.

The calculation of riveted joints should be performed according to formulas 14.2.9 , taking R bs = R rs ; R bp = R rp ; R bt = R rt ; A b = A bn = A r = 0.785
d g 2 ; γ b = 1; d b = d r .

Table 48

State of stress Conventional Connection group Calculated resistance of riveted joint, N/ mm2
designation

shear and stretching of rivets made of crushing of the connected

small steel elements

St2, St3 09G2

Slice Rrs IN 180 220 -

With 160 - -

Sprain (tear of the Rrt B, C 120 150 -

head)

Smytie Rrp IN - - Rrp = 2Ry

With - - Rrp = 1,7Ry

Notes

1 Group B shall include joints in which rivets are inserted into holes drilled in assembled elements or in parts using conductors; Group C shall
include joints in which rivets are inserted into holes punched or drilled without a conductor in individual parts.

2 When using rivets with countersunk or semi-countersunk heads, the calculated resistance of riveted joints to shear and crushing should be
reduced by multiplying by a factor of 0.8. The operation of these rivets under tension is not permitted.

18.3 Strengthening of structures

18.3.1 Structures operated at a design temperature of t ≥ -45 °C and made of low-carbon boiling steel, as well as other steels whose impact
toughness values, according to test results, are lower than those guaranteed by state standards for steels for groups of structures in accordance with
the requirements of Appendix B, shall not be subject to reinforcement or replacement, provided that the stresses in elements made of these steels do
not exceed the values ​that existed before reconstruction. The decision on the use, reinforcement or replacement of structures, if their operation will
comply with the specified condition, should be made on the basis of a conclusion.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

18.3.2 The design scheme of the structure should be adopted taking into account the features of its actual operation, including taking into account the
actual deviations in the geometric shape, section sizes, fastening conditions and execution of element connection nodes.

Verification calculations of structural elements and their connections should be performed taking into account the detected defects and damage,
corrosion wear, actual conditions of mating and support. Taking for positions 4 and 5 of Table 1 the coefficient of working conditions γ c = 1.0, the
calculation of elements should be performed according to the deformed scheme.

18.3.3 Structures that do not meet the requirements of 15.7.1 - 15.7.5 , 17.2 and sections 7 - 9 , 11 - 14 , as well as the requirements of SP 20.13330
for limiting vertical deflections, must be reinforced or replaced, except for the cases specified in this subsection.
Deviations from the geometric shape, dimensions of elements and connections from the nominal ones, exceeding those permitted by current
standards and SP 70.13330 , but not interfering with normal operation, are not eliminated provided that the load-bearing capacity of structures is
ensured, taking into account the requirements of 18.3.2 .

18.3.4 Structural elements should not be reinforced if:

their vertical and horizontal deflections and movements exceed the limit values ​established by SP 20.13330 , but do not interfere with normal
operation, based on technological requirements;

their flexibility exceeds the limit values ​established in 10.4 , but the deviations in the position of the structures do not exceed the values ​established
by SP 70.13330 , and the forces in the elements will not increase during further operation, as well as in cases where the possibility of using such
elements has been verified by calculation or testing.

18.3.5 When strengthening structures, the possibility of prestressing and active regulation of forces (including through welding, changes in the design
and calculation schemes), as well as the elastic-plastic performance of steel, the supercritical performance of thin-walled elements and cladding of
structures in accordance with current standards should be taken into account.

18.3.6 Reinforcement structures and methods of their implementation must provide for measures to reduce unwanted additional deformations of
elements during the reinforcement process in accordance with 4.3.5 .

The load-bearing capacity of structures during the process of strengthening work must be ensured taking into account the effect of weakening
sections by additional holes for bolts and the effect of welding.

Depending on the degree of loading of the elements, the reinforcement of the structure must be carried out under full load, with partial unloading or
with full unloading.

18.3.7 Intermittent flank welds are used in structures of the 3rd and 4th groups (according to Appendix B ), operated at a design temperature of at
least minus 45 °C in a non-aggressive or slightly aggressive environment, to ensure the joint operation of reinforcement parts and the existing
structure.

In all cases of corner weld application, the minimum required legs should be assigned. End sections of welds should be designed with a leg larger
than the leg of the intermediate sections, and their dimensions should be set in accordance with the calculation.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

18.3.8 When strengthening structural elements, combined connections are used: riveted with friction or riveted with bolts of precision class A.

18.3.9 In elements of design groups 1, 2, 3 or 4 (according to Appendix B ), subject to increased heating due to welding, the design stress σ d shall
not exceed the values ​of 0.2 R y ; 0.4 R y ; 0.6 R y or 0.8 R y , respectively.

The stress σ d should be determined from the loads acting during reinforcement for an unreinforced section, taking into account the actual state of the
structures (weakening of the section, curvature of the element, etc.).

If the specified stresses are exceeded, it is necessary to unload the structures or provide temporary supports.

18.3.10 The main methods of strengthening structures are:

increasing the cross-sectional area of ​individual structural elements;

changing the design of the entire frame or its individual elements;

voltage regulation.

Each of these methods is used independently or in combination with another.

18.3.11 When calculating structural elements reinforced by increasing the cross-section, the different design resistances of the structural and
reinforcement materials should be taken into account. One design resistance should be adopted, equal to the smaller of them, if they differ by no
more than 15%.

18.3.12 The strength and stability calculations for elements reinforced by increasing the cross-sections should be performed taking into account the
stresses that existed in the element at the time of reinforcement (taking into account the unloading of the structures). In this case, the initial
curvatures of the elements, the displacement of the center of gravity of the reinforced section, and the curvatures caused by welding should be taken
into account.

Welding distortions when checking the stability of elements under central compression and compression with bending should be taken into account
by introducing an additional working conditions coefficient = 0.8.

The strength test of elements for which, according to 18.3.11, one design resistance is adopted, in addition to the calculation using formulas ( 50 ), (
51 ) and ( 105 ), should be performed for the full design force without taking into account the stresses that existed before reinforcement, and when
checking the beam walls for local stability, an additional working conditions factor = 0.8 should be used.

18.3.13 The strength calculation of structural elements reinforced by increasing cross-sections should be performed using the following formulas:
a) for centrally stretched symmetrically reinforced elements - ( 5 );

b) for centrally compressed symmetrically reinforced elements

N/(ARyγNγc) ≤ 1, (216)

where γ N = 0.95 is the coefficient adopted for reinforcement without the use of welding;

γ N = 0.95 - 0.25 σ d / R y - coefficient adopted for reinforcement using welding;

c) for asymmetrically reinforced centrally stretched, centrally compressed and eccentrically compressed elements

(217)

where γ M = 0.95 is the coefficient for structures of group 1;

γ M = 1 for structures of groups 2, 3 and 4;

for N /( AR y ) ≥ 0.6, γ M = γ N should be taken , here γ N should be determined as in formula ( 216 ).

Bending moments M x and M y should be determined relative to the principal axes of the reinforced section.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

18.3.14 Calculation of the stability of compressed elements of a solid section in the plane of action of moments is performed according to the formula

N/(φeARy,efγc) ≤ 1, (218)

where A is the area of ​the reinforced section;

γ c is the coefficient of working conditions, taken to be no more than 0.9.

φ e is the coefficient determined according to Table D.3 (Appendix D) depending on the conditional flexibility of the reinforced element and the
reduced relative eccentricity m ef = ηm f η is the coefficient of influence of the cross-section shape according to Table D.2 (Appendix D);

mf = ef(A/Wc), (219)

here W c is the moment of resistance for the most compressed fiber;

е f - equivalent eccentricity, taking into account the operating characteristics of the reinforced rod and determined by the formula

and f = e + f j + k w f w . (220)

where e is the eccentricity of the longitudinal force relative to the central axis of the reinforced section after reinforcement; in cases where the
eccentricity of the longitudinal force remains unchanged, its value is determined by the expression e = e 0 - e A , where e A is the displacement of the
center of gravity of the section during reinforcement, taken with its sign (Figure 23 , a) and b);

in the general case of compression with bending, as well as in the case of application of additional longitudinal or transverse forces after
reinforcement, the value of e is determined by the expression e = M / N , where M is the calculated moment relative to the central axis of the
reinforced section; in the case of asymmetric reinforcement of a centrally compressed (initially) element, as e 0, the random eccentricity is taken into
account with such a sign as to take into account the most unfavorable case;
 Figure 23 - To determine the eccentricity of the longitudinal force
for positive (a) and negative (b) values

f f - is determined by the formula

(221)

here f 0 is the initial deflection of the reinforced element; in calculations of compressed rods for stability, the value of f 0 is determined from the
calculated initial loads; in calculations for deformability - from the standard initial loads;

ΣI r - the sum of the moments of inertia of the reinforcing elements connected simultaneously, relative to their own central axes, perpendicular to the
bending plane;

α N = N e /( N e - N 0 ) is a coefficient that takes into account the influence of longitudinal force:

when calculating bending elements α N = 1;

for small values ​of the proper moments of inertia of the reinforcement elements ( ΣI r / I < 0.1), deformations are not taken into account and f ж = f 0 ;

when attaching reinforcement elements to flat surfaces of the reinforced element, for example, parallel to the bending plane, f f = f 0 is taken ;

f w - additional residual deflection arising due to welding of reinforcing elements, determined by the formula

(222)

here a is the average discontinuity coefficient of the keyway weld taking into account the length of its end sections (for continuous welds a = 1); V =
0.04 k f 2 is the parameter of longitudinal shortening of the element due to the imposition of a single weld; k f is the leg of the connecting welds, cm; l 0
= l ef is the calculated length of the element in the bending plane (for single-span beams l 0 is the beam span); y i is the distance from the i -th weld to
the central axis of the reinforced section, taken with its sign; n i is the coefficient taking into account the initial stress-strain state of the element and
the scheme of its reinforcement and depending on ξ i = ​σ 0 i / R y 0 - the coefficient characterizing the level of initial stresses in the zone of the i -th
weld in the most loaded section of the element (Figure 24).

1 - in the tension zone of the section; 2 - in the compression zone, in stability calculations; 3 - in the compression
zone in deformation calculations; 4 - in the tension and compression zones of the section in
reinforcement schemes associated with the imposition of double-sided seams

Figure 24 - Dependencies n ( ξ ) at seams

If the welding deflection f w is a relieving factor (the sign of f w does not coincide with the sign of the sum (c + f w )) and leads to a decrease in the
absolute value of the equivalent eccentricity, then the value of k w is taken to be equal to 0.5; otherwise, k w = 1.

18.3.15 When calculating the stability of elements under central compression and compression with bending, the reduced value of the design
resistance should be adopted for the reinforced section as a whole, calculated using the formula
 (223)

where R y is the calculated resistance of the base metal, determined in accordance with the requirements of 18.2.4 ;

k is a coefficient calculated using the formula

(224)

Here R ya is the calculated resistance of the reinforcement metal;

A , I - respectively, the area and moment of inertia of the unreinforced section of the element relative to the axis perpendicular to the plane of stability
testing;

A a , I a - the same, reinforced section of the element as a whole.

18.3.16 Existing steel structures constructed in derogation from the requirements of 14.1.7 , 14.1.10 , 14.2.2 , 15.1 , 15.2.1 , 15.2.3 , 15.3.3–15.3.5 ,
15.4.2 , 15.4.5 , 15.5.2 , 15.5.4 , 15.11.1 , 16.14 , 16.16 , 17.8–17.11 , 17.16 do not require reinforcement , provided that:

there is no damage to structural elements caused by these deviations;

changes in the operating conditions of structures towards unfavourable conditions are excluded;

the bearing capacity and rigidity are justified by calculation taking into account the requirements of 18.3.2 , 18.3.4 , 18.3.9 ;

measures are taken to prevent fatigue and brittle failure of structures to which the requirements of 12.1.1 , 12.1.3 and Section 13 apply .

When these conditions are met, section type “ b ” should be adopted for stability checks of centrally compressed elements instead of type “ c ” (see
Tables 7 and D.1 (Appendix D)).

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

Appendix A
Basic letter designations of quantities

A - gross cross-sectional area;

A bn is the net cross-sectional area of ​the bolt;

A d - cross-sectional area of ​the diagonals;

A f is the cross-sectional area of ​the shelf (belt);

A n is the net cross-sectional area;

A w - cross-sectional area of ​the wall;

A wf is the cross-sectional area of ​the fillet weld metal;

A wz - cross-sectional area of ​the fusion boundary metal;

B - bimoment, bending-torsional bimoment;

E - modulus of elasticity;

F is force;

G - shear modulus;

I - moment of inertia of the gross section;

I b - moment of inertia of the branch section;

I m , I d - moments of inertia of the section of the chord and diagonals of the truss;

I r - moment of inertia of the section of the rib, bar;

I rl - moment of inertia of the longitudinal rib section;

I t - moment of inertia during free torsion;

I x , I y - moments of inertia of the gross section relative to the axes x - x and y - y, respectively;

I xn , I yn - the same, net sections;

I ω - sectorial moment of inertia of the section;

I ωn - the same, net cross-section;

M - moment, bending moment;

M x ; M y are moments relative to the axes x - x and y - y, respectively;

N - longitudinal force;

- additional effort;

N b ns - longitudinal force from the moment in the column branch;

Q - transverse force, shear force;

Q f ic - conditional transverse force for connecting elements;

Q s - conditional transverse force falling on a system of planks located in one plane;

R ba - calculated tensile strength of foundation bolts;

R bp - calculated resistance to crushing of a single-bolt connection;

R bs - calculated shear strength of a single-bolt connection;

R.t - calculated tensile strength of a single-bolt connection ;

R b un - standard resistance of bolt steel, taken equal to the ultimate strength σ in accordance with national standards and technical specifications for
bolts;

R bu - calculated tensile strength of U-bolts;

R byn is the standard resistance of bolt steel, taken equal to the yield strength σ t according to national standards and technical specifications for
bolts;

R cd - calculated resistance to diametrical compression of rollers (with free contact in structures with limited mobility);

R dh - calculated tensile strength of high-strength wire;

R lp - calculated resistance to local crushing in cylindrical joints (trunnions) with close contact;

R p - calculated resistance of steel to end surface crushing (if there is a fit);

R s - calculated shear resistance of steel;

R u - calculated resistance of steel to tension, compression, bending by ultimate strength;

R un - the ultimate tensile strength of steel, taken as equal to the minimum value of σ in accordance with national standards and technical
specifications for steel;

R v - calculated fatigue resistance of steel;

R wf - calculated resistance of fillet welds to shear (conditional) on the weld metal;

R w u - calculated resistance of butt welded joints to tension, compression, bending according to temporary resistance;

R w un - standard resistance of the weld metal for ultimate strength;

R ws - design shear resistance of butt welded joints;

R wy - calculation of the resistance of butt welded joints to tension, compression, bending at the yield point;

R wz - calculated resistance of fillet welds to shear (conditional) along the fusion boundary metal;
R y - calculated resistance of steel to tension, compression, bending at the yield point;

R yf - the same, for the shelf (belt);

R yw - the same for the wall;

R yn is the yield strength of steel, taken as equal to the value of the yield strength σ t according to national standards and technical specifications for
steel;

S is the static moment of the shear part of the gross section relative to the neutral axis;

W x ; W y - moments of resistance of the gross section relative to the axes x - x and y - y, respectively;

W c ; W t - moments of resistance of the section for the compressed and stretched flange, respectively;

W xn ; W yn - moments of resistance of the net section relative to the axes x - x and y - y, respectively;

W ω - sectorial moment of resistance of the gross section;

W ω n - sectorial moment of resistance of the net section;

W cω ; W tω - sectorial moment of resistance of the section for the most compressed and stretched point of the section, respectively;

b - width;

b e f is the calculated width;

b f - shelf (belt) width;

b r - width of the protruding part of the rib, overhang;

c x ; c y - coefficients for calculation taking into account the development of plastic deformations during bending relative to the axes x - x , y - y ,
respectively;

d - diameter of the bolt hole;

d b - outer diameter of the bolt shank;

e - eccentricity of force;

h - height;

h e f - calculated wall height;

h w - wall height;

i - radius of gyration of the section;

i m in - the smallest radius of gyration of the section;

i x ; i y - radii of inertia of the section relative to the axes x - x and y - y, respectively;

k f - leg of fillet weld;

l - length, span;

l c - length of the rack, column, strut;

l d - length of the diagonal;

l ef is calculated length;

l m - length of the truss or column belt panel;

l s - length of the bar;

l w - weld length;

l x ; l y - calculated lengths of the element in planes perpendicular to the axes x - x and y - y , respectively;

m - relative eccentricity, m = eA / W c ;

r - radius;
t - thickness;

t f - shelf (belt) thickness;

t w - wall thickness;

α f - the ratio of the cross-sectional areas of the shelf (belt) and the wall, α f = A f / A w ;

β f ; β z - coefficients for calculating the fillet weld, respectively, for the weld metal and for the fusion boundary metal;

γ b - coefficient of operating conditions of the bolted connection;

γ c - coefficient of working conditions;

γ f - load safety factor;

γ m - material safety factor;

γ n - coefficient of reliability according to responsibility;

γ u - reliability factor in calculations of temporary resistance;

γ s - coefficient of reliability for system stability;

η - coefficient of influence of the cross-section shape;

λ - flexibility, λ = l ef / i ;

- conditional flexibility, ;

λ ef - reduced flexibility of a through-section rod;

- conditional reduced flexibility of a through-section rod, ;

- conditional flexibility of the belt overhang ;

- conditional flexibility of the belt sheet, ;

- conditional flexibility of the wall, ;

- ultimate conditional flexibility of the belt overhang (belt sheet);

- ultimate conditional flexibility of the wall;

λ x ; λ y - calculated slenderness of the element in planes perpendicular to the axes x - x and y - y , respectively;

| σ | - absolute value of normal stress;

σ loc - local stress;

σ x ; σ y - normal stresses parallel to the axes x - x and y - y , respectively;

τ ; τ xy - shear stress;

τ x ; τ y - shear stresses parallel to the axes x - x and y - y , respectively;

φ - coefficient of stability under central compression;

φ x( y) - coefficient of stability under compression;

φ b - coefficient of stability in bending;

φ e - coefficient of stability under compression with bending;

φ exy - coefficient of stability under compression with bending in two planes;

ω is the sectorial coordinate.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

Appendix B
Physical characteristics of materials for steel structures

Table B.1 - Physical characteristics of materials for steel structures

Features Meaning

Density ρ , kg/ m3 :

rolled products and steel castings 7850

cast iron castings 7200

Coefficient of linear expansion α , °С -1 0,12·10-4

Elastic modulus E , N/mm 2

rolled steel, steel castings 2,06·105

castings from cast iron grades:

SCH15 0,83·105

SCH20, SCH25, SCH30 0,98·105

bundles and strands of parallel wires 1,96·105

steel ropes:

spiral and closed bearings 1,67·105

double twist 1,47·105

double twisted with non-metallic core 1,27·105

Shear modulus of rolled steel and steel castings G , N/ mm2 0,79·105

Transverse deformation coefficient (Poisson) v 0,3

Note - The values ​of the modulus of elasticity are given for ropes pre-stretched with a force equal to at least 60% of the breaking force for the rope
as a whole.

Table B.2 - Physical characteristics of wires and cables

Name of materials Brand and nominal Elastic modulus E , Coefficient of linear

cross-section, mm2 N/mm 2 expansion α , °C - 1

Aluminum wires according to GOST 839 A, ANP; 16 ÷ 800 0,630·105 0,23·10-4

 Copper wires according to GOST 839 M; 4 ÷ 800 1,300·105 0,17·10-4

Steel-aluminum wires according to GOST 839 with the ratio of AS, ASK;
the areas of aluminum to steel equal to:

ASKP, ASKS

6 ÷ 6,25 10 and more 0,825·105 0,192·10-4

0,65 95 1,460·105 0,139·10-4

4,29 - 4,39 120 and more 0,890·105 0,183·10-4

7,71 - 8,04 150 and more 0,770·105 0,198·10-4

1,46 185 and more 1,140·105 0,155·10-4

12,22 330 0,665·105 0,212·10-4

18,2 ÷ 18,5 400 and 500 0,665·105 0,212·10-4

Bimetallic steel-copper wire according to GOST 3822, diameter, BSM 1

mm:

1,6 ÷ 4 2,0 ÷ 12,5 1,870·105 0,127·10-4

6 28,2 1,900·105 0,124·10-4

Note - The values ​of the mass of wires and cables should be taken in accordance with GOST 839 and GOST 3822 .

Appendix B
Materials for steel structures and their design resistances

Steel structure groups

Group 1. Welded structures* or their elements operating under particularly severe conditions (according to GOST 25546 ), including those that
maximally restrict the development of plastic deformations, or are directly exposed to dynamic**, vibration or moving loads [crane track beams; work
platform beams; overhead transport track beams; structural elements of bunker and unloading racks that directly bear loads from rolling stock; main
beams and frame crossbars under dynamic load; span structures of conveyor galleries; truss packaging; walls, bottom edges, stiffening rings, floating
roofs, tank and gas holders coverings; bunker beams; parabolic bunker shells; steel shells of free-standing chimneys; welded special supports for
large power transmission line (PTL) crossings over 60 m high; elements of mast guys and guy assemblies].

Group 2. Welded structures or their elements operating under static load in the presence of tensile stresses [trusses; frame crossbars; floor and roof
beams; stair stringers; silo shells; overhead power line supports, with the exception of welded supports of large crossings; busbar supports of open
switchgear of substations (OSS); supports of conveyor galleries; floodlight masts; elements of combined supports of antenna structures (AS) and
other tensile, tensile-bending and bending elements], as well as structures and their elements of group 1 in the absence of welded joints and
overhead track beams made of I-beams according to GOST 19425 in the presence of welded assembly joints.

Group 3. Welded structures or their elements operating under static load, primarily in compression [columns; posts; support plates; floor deck
elements; structures supporting process equipment; vertical ties along columns with stresses in the design sections of ties exceeding 0.4 Ry ; anchor,
load-bearing and fixing structures (supports, beams of rigid crossbars, clamps) of the transport overhead contact network; supports for switchgear
equipment, except for supports for circuit breakers; elements of NPP shafts and towers; columns of concrete mixing overpasses; roof purlins and
other compressed and compressed-bending elements], as well as structures and their elements of group 2 in the absence of welded joints.

Group 4. Auxiliary structures of buildings and structures (connections, other than those specified in group 3; half-timbered elements; stairs; ladders;
platforms; fences; metal structures of cable channels; auxiliary elements of structures, etc.); structures of class KS-1 ( GOST 27751 ) - greenhouses;
hotbeds; buildings in which permanent presence of people is not envisaged (mobile collapsible and container type, temporary warehouses and
structures with a limited service life, sheet pile walls of pits, temporary supports, etc.), as well as structures and their elements of group 3 in the
absence of welded joints.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

Notes

1 When assigning steel for the structures of buildings and structures of class KS-3 ( GOST 27751 ), the group number of structures should be
reduced by one (for groups 2 - 4).

2 For rolled product thickness t > 40 mm, the design group number should be decreased by one (for groups 2 - 4); for rolled product thickness t ≤ 6
mm, it should be increased by one (for groups 1 - 3).

_____________

* A structure or its element is considered to have welded joints if they are located in areas where significant calculated tensile stresses are applied ( σ
> 0.3 R y ; σ > 0.3 R wf or σ > 0.3 R wz ) or in areas where the welded joint may be destroyed, for example, due to significant residual stresses, which
may result in the structure as a whole being unsuitable for use.

** Structures are considered to be subject to dynamic loads if the ratio of the absolute value of the normal stress caused by the dynamic load to the
total tensile stress from all loads in the same section α > 0.2 - see formula ( 170 ).

Table B.1 - Standardized impact toughness indicators for rolled products and pipes 1)

Calculated temperature, Group of structures Standard resistance of steel, N/ mm2

°C

Ryn < 290 290 ≤ Ryn < 390 390 ≤ Ryn < 440 440 ≤ Ryn < 540 R yn ≥
540

Impact strength indicators KCV, J/cm2 5 ) 6)

at impact bending test temperature, °C

+20 0 -20 -40 -40 -60 -40 -60 -60

t ≥ -45 1, 2, 3 - 34 34 + 34 + 66/344) 40 66

4 +2) 343) + + + + + + -

-45 > t ≥ -55 1 - - - 34 34 + 66/344) + 66

2, 3 - 34 34 + 34 + 66/344) + 66

4 - 34 343) + + + + + -

t ≤ -55 1, 2, 3 - - - 34 - 34 - 66/344) 66

4 - - 34 + + + + + -
 The sign “-” means that the use of steel with such guarantees is not permitted;

“+” sign - it is permissible to use the actual results of mechanical properties in the delivered batch of rolled products with standard values ​of KCV
-20 , KCV -40 , KCV -60 ≥ 34 J/cm2 and for steels with R at KCV -40 , KCV -60 ≥ 66/34 J/ cm2 .
yn ≥ 440 N/mm2

____________

1)
Standards are established based on impact bending tests of samples with a sharp V-shaped notch of rolled products with a thickness of at least
5 mm and pipes with a wall thickness of at least 5 mm. In the case of an element thickness of less than 5 mm, testing is not required.

2)
C235 steels are used without guarantees for impact toughness.

3)
For structures with a limited service life and the presence of people in them.

4)
Numerator - standard values ​for sheet steel and pipes; denominator - for shaped rolled products.

5)
In sheet metal products, transverse samples are tested; in wide-strip universal, shaped, and sectional products, and in pipes and profiles,
longitudinal samples are tested.

6) In electric-welded pipes, the standards apply to the impact toughness of the base metal, the weld metal and the fusion boundary.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

Table B.2 - Requirements for chemical composition

Standard resistance of steel, N/ mm2 Content of elements*, % (not more than) From z , % (no more)

With R S

Ryn < 290 0,22 0,040 0,025 -

290 ≤ Ryn < 390 0,14 0,025 0,025 0,45

390 ≤ Ryn < 540 0,12 0,017** 0,010** 0,46

540 ≤ Ryn < 590 0,13 0,015 0,010 0,47

R yn ≥ 590 0,15 0,015 0,004 0,60

___________

* Maximum deviations in chemical composition in finished rolled products are accepted according to the current standard.

** S + P ≤ 0,020 %.

Notes

1 Carbon equivalent C e %, should be determined by the formula

where C , Mn , Si , Cr , Ni , Cu , V , Nb , Mo , P are the mass fractions of elements, % .

2 For steels with standard resistance 290 ≤ R yn < 390 N/mm 2, increase the carbon content to 0.17%.

3 For I-beams with parallel flange edges, the carbon content is taken for steels C345-1 and C355-1 - up to 0.18%; steel C390 - up to 0.16%; steel
C440 - up to 0.17%.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 , No. 2 )

Table B.3 - Standard and design resistances to tension, compression and bending of sheet, wide-strip universal, rolled products and pipes
1)
 Steel Rolled thickness, mm Standard resistance* of rolled products and Calculated resistance** of rolled products and pipes,
pipes, N/ mm2 N/ mm2

R yn Run Ry Ru

C235 From 2.0 to 4.0 inclusive. 235 360 230/225 350/345

C245 From 2.0 to 20 inclusive. 245 370 240/235 360/350

S255 From 2.0 to 3.9 inclusive. 255 380 250/245 370/360

» 4,0 » 10 » 245 380 240/235 370/360

St. 10 to 20 » 245 370 240/235 360/350

» 20 to 40 » 235 370 230/225 360/350

S345 From 2.0 to 10 inclusive. 345 490 340/330 480/470

S345K From 4.0 to 10 inclusive. 345 470 340/330 460/450

C355 From 8.0 to 16 inclusive. 355 490 350/340 460/450

» 16 » 40 » 345 490 340/330 460/450

» 40 » 60 » 335 490 330/320 460/450

» 60 » 80 » 325 490 320/310 460/450

» 80 »100 » 315 470 310/300 460/450

» 100 »160 » 295 470 285/280 460/450

C355-1; From 8.0 to 16 inclusive. 345 490 350/340 460/450

C355-K » 16 » 40 » 345 490 340/330 460/450

» 40 » 50 » 335 490 330/320 460/450

C355P From 8.0 to 16 inclusive. 355 490 350/340 460/450

» 16 » 40 » 345 490 340/330 460/450

C390; From 8.0 to 50 inclusive. 390 520 380/370 505/495

C390-1

C440 From 8.0 to 50 inclusive. 440 540 430/420 525/515

 S550 From 8.0 to 50 inclusive. 540 640 525/515 625/610

S590 From 8.0 to 50 inclusive. 590 685 575/560 670/650

S690 From 8.0 to 50 inclusive. 690 785 -/650 -/745

____________

* The guaranteed values ​of yield strength and ultimate strength given in the ND are taken as the standard resistance. In cases where these values
​in the ND are given in only one system of units - kgf/mm2 , the standard resistances, N/mm2 , should be calculated by multiplying the
corresponding values ​by 9.81, rounding up to 5 N/ mm2 .

** The values ​of the design resistances are obtained by dividing the standard resistances by the material safety factors determined in accordance
with Table 3, rounded to 5 N/mm 2 . The numerator contains the values ​of the design resistances of the rolled products according to the standard
documentation, which uses a statistical procedure for monitoring the properties of the rolled products ( γ m = 1.025); the denominator contains the
design resistance of the remaining rolled products at γ m = 1.050.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

____________

1)
Seamless and seamless hot-deformed steel pipes, as well as electric-welded straight-seam pipes with a diameter of 114-530 mm with a wall
thickness of 4.0 to 12.7 mm; with a diameter of 508-1422 mm with a wall thickness of 8 to 50 mm and a diameter of 530-1420 mm with improved
weldability and cold resistance for building metal structures should be accepted according to the relevant current technical specifications. Pipes with
a diameter of 114-530 mm, welded by high-frequency welding (HFW), should be used only after volumetric heat treatment (VHT).

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

Table B.4 - Standard and design resistances to tension, compression and bending of rolled sections in the form of I-beams with parallel
flange faces

Steel Thickness of the profile shelf, mm Standard resistance of rolled products, N/ mm2 Calculated resistance of rolled products, N/ mm2

R yn Run Ry Ru

≤ 10 255 380 250 370

St. 10 to 20 inclusive. 245 370 240 360

» 20 » 40 » 235 370 230 360

S255B; » 40 » 60 » 235 370 230 360

S255B-1 » 60 » 80 » 225 370 220 360

» 80 » 100 » 215 370 210 360

> 100 200 360 195 350

≤ 10 345 480 335 470

S345B St. 10 to 20 inclusive. 325 470 315 460

» 20 » 40 » 305 460 300 450

 » 40 » 60 » 285 450 280 440

≤ 10 345 490 335 480

S345B-1 St. 10 to 20 inclusive. 325 470 315 460

» 20 » 40 » 305 460 300 450

» 40 » 60 » 285 450 280 440

≤ 20 355 470 345 460

St. 20 to 40 inclusive. 345 470 335 460

S355B » 40 » 60 » 335 470 325 460

» 60 » 80 » 325 460 315 450

» 80 » 100 » 315 460 305 450

> 100 295 460 290 450

≤ 20 355 470 345 460

S355B-1 St. 20 to 40 inclusive. 345 470 335 460

» 40 » 60 » 335 470 325 460

≤ 30 390 520 380 505

S390B St. 30 to 60 inclusive. 370 490 360 480

St. 60 to 80 inclusive. 360 480 350 470

St. 80 to 100 inclusive. 350 480 340 470

> 100 330 470 320 460

St. 20 to 30 inclusive. 430 560 420 545

S440B » 30 » 80 » 420 520 410 505

» 80 » 100 » 400 520 390 505

> 100 380 500 370 490

Note - The number 1 in the first column indicates the chemical composition variant.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

Table B.5 - Standard and calculated resistance to tension, compression and bending of rolled sections

Steel Rolled thickness*, mm Standard resistance of rolled products**, N/ Calculated resistance of rolled products***, N/ mm2
mm2

R yn Run Ry Ru

C245 From 4.0 to 20 inclusive. 245 370 240/235 360/350

» 20 » 40 » 235 370 230/225 360/350

S255 From 4.0 to 10 inclusive. 255 380 250/245 370/360

» 10 » 20 » 245 370 240/235 360/350

» 20 »40 » 235 370 230/225 360/350

S345 From 4.0 to 10 inclusive. 345 480 340/330 470/460

» 10 » 20 » 325 470 320/310 460/450

» 20 » 40 » 305 460 300/290 450/440

S345K From 4.0 to 10 inclusive. 345 470 340/330 460/450

C355 From 8.0 to 16 inclusive. 355 490 350/340 460/450

» 16 » 40 » 345 480 340/330 460/450

C355-1 From 8.0 to 16 inclusive. 355 490 350/340 460/450

» 16 » 40 » 345 480 340/330 460/450

C390 From 8.0 to 10 inclusive. 390 520 380/370 505/495

» 10 » 20 » 380 500 370/360 480/475

» 20 to 40 » 370 490 360/350 480/470

_____________

* The thickness of the shaped rolled product should be taken as the thickness of the shelf.

** The guaranteed values ​of yield strength and ultimate strength given in national standards or technical conditions are taken as the standard
resistance. In cases where these values ​in national standards or technical conditions are given in only one system of units - kgf/mm2 , the
standard resistances, N/mm2 , are calculated by multiplying the corresponding values ​by 9.81 and rounding to 5 N/ mm2 .

*** The values ​of the design resistances are obtained by dividing the standard resistances by the material safety factors determined in accordance
with Table 3, rounded to 5 N/mm 2 . The numerator contains the values ​of the design resistances of the rolled products according to the regulatory
documentation, which uses the procedure for monitoring the properties of the rolled products ( γ m = 1.025), and the denominator contains the
design resistance of the remaining rolled products at γ m = 1.050.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

Table B.6 - Calculated resistance of rolled products to end surface crushing, local crushing in cylindrical hinges, and diametrical
compression of rollers

Tensile strength, Calculated resistance, N/ mm2

N/ mm2

to crush Diametrical compression of rollers (with free contact in

structures with limited mobility) R cd

end surface (if local in cylindrical joints (trunnions) with

fitted) R p tight contact R lp

360 351/343 176/171 9/9

370 361/352 180/176 9/9

380 371/362 185/181 9/9

390 380/371 190/185 10/10

400 390/381 195/190 10/10

430 420/409 210/204 10/10

440 429/419 215/209 11/11

450 439/428 220/214 11/11

460 449/438 224/219 11/11

470 459/448 229/224 11/11

480 468/457 234/228 12/12

490 478/467 239/233 12/12

510 498/486 249/243 12/12

540 527/514 263/257 13/13

570 556/543 278/271 14/14

590 576/562 288/281 14/14

Note - The table shows the values ​of the design resistances calculated using the formulas of Section 6 with γ m = 1.025 (in the numerator) and γ m
= 1.050 (in the denominator).

Table B.7 - Calculated resistances of carbon steel castings

 State of stress Conventional Calculated resistances, N/mm 2 , of carbon steel
designation castings of grades

15L 25L 35L 45L

Tension, compression and bending Ru 150 180 210 250

Shift Rs 90 110 130 150

End surface crushing (if there is a fit) Rp 230 270 320 370

Local crushing in cylindrical joints (pins) with flat contact R lp 110 130 160 180

Diametrical compression of rollers with free contact (in Rcd 6 7 8 10

structures with limited mobility)

Table B.8 - Calculated resistances of grey cast iron castings

State of stress Conventional designation Calculated resistances, N/mm 2 , of grey cast iron castings of grades

SCH15 SCH20 SCH25 SCH30

Central extension and bending Rt 55 65 85 100

Central compression and bending Rc 160 200 230 250

Shift Rs 40 50 65 75

End surface crushing (if there is a fit) Rp 240 300 340 370

Figure B.1 - Generalized design diagram of the performance of structural steels

Table B.9 - Steel characteristics for the generalized design work diagram (see Figure B.1)

Chart Steel
parameter

S245, S255, S255B, S345, S345K, S355, S355-1, S355P, S345B, S345B- S390, S390-1, S440, S550,
S255B-1 1, S355B, S355B-1 S390B S440B S590

0,8 0,8 0,9 0,9 0,9

 0,8 0,8 0,9 0,9 0,9

1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,7

1 1 1 1 1

14,0 16,0 17,0 17,0 18,0

141,6 88,3 67,1 49,6 26,2

1,653 1,415 1,345 1,33 1,16

251 153 115 87,2 51,1

1,35 1,26 1,23 1,20 1,10

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

Appendix G
Materials for steel structure connections

Table G.1 - Welding materials corresponding to steel

Characteristics of steel Brand of welding material Electrode type

Welding wire for automatic and mechanical welding Flusa Powder wire

In carbon dioxide or in its mixture Under flux

with argon

R yn < 290 N/mm 2 Sv-08G2S Sv-08A AN-348-A PP-AN-3 E42,

AN-60 * PP-AN-8 E42A

PFK-56S *4
Sv-08GA E46,
UF-02; UF-
03*5 E46A

290 N/mm 2 ≤ R yn < 590 Sv-10GA ** AN-17-M E50,

N/mm 2
AN-43 E50A

AN-47
Sv-10G2 **
AN-348-A ***

PFK-56S *4
Sv-10NMA
UF-02; UF-
03*5
 R yn ≥ 590 N/mm 2 Sv-08G2S Sv-10NMA AN-17-M PP-AN-3 E60

PFK-56S *4 PP-AN-8
Sv-08HGSMA
UF-02; UF-
03*5
Sv-10HG2SMA Sv-08KHN2GMYu E70

___________

*
Flux AN-60 and electrodes of type E42, E46, E50 should be used for structures of groups 2, 3 at design temperatures t ≥ minus 45 °C.

**
Do not use in combination with AN-43 flux.

***
For flux AH-348-A, additional control of the mechanical properties of the weld metal is required when welding joints of elements of all
thicknesses at design temperatures t < -45 °C and thicknesses over 32 mm - at design temperatures t ≥ minus 45 °C.

*4
Ceramic flux PFK-56S according to technical specifications for automatic welding of butt joints of structures of steel bridge spans.

*5
Ceramic welding flux agglomerated grade UF-02 and grade UF-03 according to the relevant technical specifications.

Note - With the appropriate technical and economic justification, welding materials (wires, fluxes, shielding gases) not listed in this table are used
for welding structures. In this case, the mechanical properties of the weld metal produced using them must not be lower than the properties
ensured by using the materials listed in this table.

Table G.2 - Standard and design resistances of weld metal of welded joints with fillet welds

Welding materials R wun , N/mm 2 R wf , N/mm 2

electrode type wire brand

E42, E42A Sv-08, Sv-08A 410 180

E46, E46A SV-08GA, 450 200

E50, E50A Sv-08G2S, Sv-10GA, PP-AN-8, PP-AN-3 490 215

E60 Sv-08G2S * , Sv-10NMA, Sv-10G2 590 240

E70 SV-10HG2SMA, SV-08HN2GMYU 685 280

E85 - 835 340

___________

* Only for joints with a leg k f ≤ 8 mm in structures made of steel with a yield strength of 440 N/mm2 or more.

Table G.3 - Requirements for bolts under various conditions of their use

Calculated temperature t , °C Strength class of bolts and requirements for them (according to ND) in structures,

not counting on fatigue calculated on fatigue

when working with bolts on

stretch or cut slice stretch or cut slice

 > -45 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6

- 5.8 - -

8.8 8.8 8.8 8.8

10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9

- 12.9 - 12.9

-45 > t ≥ -55 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6

8.8 8.8 8.81) 8.8

10.9 10.9 10.91) 10.9

- 12.9 - 12.9

< -55 5.6 5.6 - 5.6

8.81) 8.8 8.81) 8.8

10.91) 10.9 10.91) 10.9

- 12.9 - 12.9

____________

1)
With the requirement of a tensile test on an oblique washer.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

Table G.4 - Steel grades of foundation bolts and conditions of their use

Constructions Steel grades at design temperature, t °C

≥ -45 -45 > t ≥ -55 < -55

Structures other than overhead power line supports, switchgear and contact networks St3ps2, St3ps4, -

St3sp2 St3sp4 -

20 - -

- 09G2S-4 09G2S-4
 For U-bolts, as well as foundation bolts for overhead power line supports, switchgear and St3ps4, - -

St3sp4 - -

- 09G2S-4 09G2S-6

Table G.5 - Standard resistances of bolt steel and design resistances of single-bolt connections to shear and tension, N/ mm2

Strength class of bolts R bun R bun Rbs R bt

5.6 500 300 210 225

5.8 500 400 210 -

8.8 830 664 332 451

10.9 1040 936 416 728

12.9 1220 1098 427 854

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

Table G.6 - Calculated bearing resistance of elements connected with bolts

Ultimate strength of steel of connected elements R un , Calculated resistance R bp , N/mm 2 , to crushing of elements connected by bolts of
N/mm 2 accuracy class

A IN

360 560 475

370 580 485

380 590 500

390 610 515

430 670 565

440 685 580

450 700 595

460 720 605

470 735 620

480 750 630

 490 765 645

510 795 670

540 845 710

570 890 750

590 920 775

Note - The design resistance values ​given in the table are calculated using the formulas in Section 4 , rounded to 5 N/mm 2 .

Table G.7 - Calculated tensile strengths of foundation bolts

Nominal diameter of bolts, mm Calculated resistances R ba , N/mm 2 , of steel bolts

St3ps4, St3ps2, St3sp4, St3sp2 09G2S-4, 09G2S-6

12, 16, 20 200 265

24, 30 190 245

36 190 230

42, 48, 56 180 230

64, 72, 80 180 220

90, 100 180 210

110, 125, 140 165 210

Notes

1 Steel must be supplied according to group 1.

2 The values ​of the calculated resistances indicated in the table are calculated using the formulas in section 6.6, rounded to 5 N/mm 2 .

3 The design resistances of bolts made of steels of other grades should be calculated using the formulas in Section 6 .

Table G.8 - (Excluded. Amendment No. 2 )

Table G.9 - Cross-sectional areas of bolts

d , mm 16 (18) 20 (22) 24 (27) 30 36 42 48

A b , cm 2 2,01 2,54 3,14 3,80 4,52 5,72 7,06 10,17 13,85 18,09

A bn , cm 2 1,57 1,92 2,45 3,03 3,53 4,59 5,61 8,16 11,20 14,72
 Notes

1 The cross-sectional areas of bolts with a diameter greater than 48 mm should be taken in accordance with current standards.

2 Dimensions in brackets should be used only in the structures of overhead power line supports and outdoor switchgear.

Appendix D
Coefficients for calculating the stability of centrally and eccentrically compressed elements

Table D.1 - Stability coefficients for central compression

Conditional flexibility Coefficients φ for section type Conditional flexibility Coefficients φ for section type

a b with a b with

0,4 1000 1000 984 4,6 359 329

0,6 994 986 956 4,8 330 308

0,8 981 967 929 5,0 304 289

1,0 968 948 901 5,2 281 271

1,2 953 927 872 5,4 261 255

1,4 938 905 842 5,6 242 241

1,6 920 881 811 5,8 226

1,8 900 855 778 6,0 211

2,0 877 826 744 6,2 198

2,2 851 794 709 6,4 186

2,4 821 760 672 6,6 174

2,6 786 723 635 6,8 164

2,8 747 683 598 7,0 155

3,0 704 643 562 7,2 147

3,2 660 602 527 7,4 139

3,4 616 562 493 7,6 132

3,6 572 524 460 7,8 125

 3,8 526 487 430 8,0 119

4,0 475 453 402 8,5 105

4,2 431 422 375 9,0 094

4,4 393 392 351 9,5 084

10,0 076

Note : The values ​of the coefficients φ in the table are increased by 1000 times.

Table D.2 - Influence coefficients of the cross-section shape η

Section Section diagram and eccentricity Af Values​​of η at

type
Aw
0≤ ≤5 >5

0,1 ≤ m ≤ 5 5 < m ≤ 20 0,1 ≤ m ≤5 5 < m≤

20

1 - 1,0 1,0 1,0

2 - 0,85 0,85 0,85

3 - 0,75 + 0,02 0,75 + 0,02 0,85

4 - (1,35 - 0,05m) - 0,01(5 - m) 1,1 1,1

5 0,25 (1,45 - 0,05m) - 0,01(5 - m) 1,2 1,2

0,5 (1,75 - 0,1m) - 0,02(5 - m) 1,25 1,25

≥ (1,90 - 0,1m) - 0,02(6 - m) 1,4 - 0,02 1,3

1,0

6 - the 5 the 5
 7 -

8 0,25 (0,75 + 0,05m) + 0,01(5 - 1,0 1,0

m)

0,5 (0,5 + 0,1m) + 0,02(5 - m) 1,0 1,0

≥1 (0,25 + 0,15m) + 0,03(5 - 1,0 1,0

m)

9 0,5 (1,25 - 0,05m) - 0,01(5 - m) 1,0 1,0

≥1 (1,5 - 0,1m) - 0,02(5 - m) 1,0 1,0

10 0,5 1,4 1,4 1,4 1,4

1,0 1,6 - 0,01(5 - m) 1,6 1,35 + 1,6

0,05m

2,0 1,8 - 0,02(5 - m) 1,8 1,3 + 0,1m 1,8

11 0,5 1.45 + 0.04 m 1,65 1.45 + 0.04 1,65

m

1,0 1,8 + 0,12m 2,4 1,8 + 0,12m 2,4

1,5 2,0 + 0,25m + 0,1 - - -

2,0 3,0 + 0,25m + 0,1 - - -

Notes

1 For section types 5 - 7, when calculating the values ​of A f / A w, the area of ​the vertical elements of the shelves should not be taken into account.

2 For section types 6 - 7, the values ​of η 5 should be taken equal to the values ​of η for type 5 with the same values ​of A f / A w .

( Repair )

Table D.3 - Stability factors φ e under eccentric compression of solid-walled rods in the plane of action of the moment, coinciding with the
plane of symmetry

Conditional flexibility The value of φ e at the given relative eccentricity m ef

0,1 0,25 0,5 0,75 1,0 1,25 1,5 1,75 2,0

0,5 967 922 850 782 722 669 620 577 538

1,0 925 854 778 711 653 600 563 520 484
 1,5 875 804 716 647 593 548 507 470 439

2,0 813 742 653 587 536 496 457 425 397

2,5 742 672 587 526 480 442 410 383 357

3,0 667 597 520 465 425 395 365 342 320

3,5 587 522 455 408 375 350 325 303 287

4,0 505 447 394 356 330 309 289 270 256

4,5 418 382 342 310 288 272 257 242 229

5,0 354 326 295 273 253 239 225 215 205

5,5 302 280 256 240 224 212 200 192 184

6,0 258 244 223 210 198 190 178 172 166

6,5 223 213 196 185 176 170 160 155 149

7,0 194 186 173 163 157 152 145 141 136

8,0 152 146 138 133 128 121 117 115 113

9,0 122 117 112 107 103 100 098 096 093

Continuation of table D.3

Conditional flexibility The value of φ e at the given relative eccentricity m ef

2,5 3,0 3,5 4,0 4,5 5,0 5,5 6,0 6,5

0,5 469 417 370 337 307 280 260 237 222

1,0 427 382 341 307 283 259 240 225 209

1,5 388 347 312 283 262 240 223 207 195

2,0 352 315 286 260 240 222 206 193 182

2,5 317 287 262 238 220 204 190 178 168

3,0 287 260 238 217 202 187 175 166 156

3,5 258 233 216 198 183 172 162 153 145
 4,0 232 212 197 181 168 158 149 140 135

4,5 208 192 178 165 155 146 137 130 125

5,0 188 175 162 150 143 135 126 120 117

5,5 170 158 148 138 132 124 117 112 108

6,0 153 145 137 128 120 115 109 104 too

6,5 140 132 125 117 112 106 101 097 094

7,0 127 121 115 108 102 098 094 091 087

8,0 106 100 095 091 087 083 081 078 076

End of table D.3

Conditional flexibility The value of φ e at the given relative eccentricity m ef

7,0 8,0 9,0 10 12 14 17 20

0,5 210 183 164 150 125 106 090 077

1,0 196 175 157 142 121 103 086 074

1,5 182 163 148 134 114 099 082 070

2,0 170 153 138 125 107 094 079 067

2,5 158 144 130 118 101 090 076 065

3,0 147 135 123 112 097 086 073 063

3,5 137 125 115 106 092 082 069 060

4,0 127 118 108 098 088 078 066 057

4,5 118 110 101 093 083 075 064 055

5,0 111 103 095 088 079 072 062 053

5,5 104 095 089 084 075 069 060 051

Notes

1 The values ​of the coefficients φ e in the table are increased by 1000 times.

2 The values ​of φ e should be taken to be no greater than the values ​of φ .
Table D.4 - Stability factors φ e under eccentric compression of through rods in the plane of action of the moment, coinciding with the
plane of symmetry

Conditional reduced flexibility The value of φ e at relative eccentricity m

0,1 0,25 0,5 0,75 1,0 1,25 1,5 1,75 2,0

0,5 908 800 666 571 500 444 400 364 333

1,0 872 762 640 553 483 431 387 351 328

1,5 830 727 600 517 454 407 367 336 311

2,0 774 673 556 479 423 381 346 318 293

2,5 708 608 507 439 391 354 322 297 274

3,0 637 545 455 399 356 324 296 275 255

3,5 562 480 402 355 320 294 270 251 235

4,0 484 422 357 317 288 264 246 228 215

4,5 415 365 315 281 258 237 223 207 196

5,0 350 315 277 250 230 212 201 186 178

5,5 300 273 245 223 203 192 182 172 163

6,0 255 237 216 198 183 174 165 156 149

6,5 221 208 190 178 165 157 149 142 137

7,0 192 184 168 160 150 141 135 130 125

8,0 148 142 136 130 123 118 113 108 105

Continuation of table D.4

Conditional reduced flexibility The value of φ e at relative eccentricity m

2,5 3,0 3,5 4,0 4,5 5,0 5,5 6,0 6,5

0,5 286 250 222 200 182 167 154 143 133

1,0 280 243 218 197 180 165 151 142 131

1,5 271 240 211 190 178 163 149 137 128
 2,0 255 228 202 183 170 156 143 132 125

2,5 238 215 192 175 162 148 136 127 120

3,0 222 201 182 165 153 138 130 121 116

3,5 206 187 170 155 143 130 123 115 by

4,0 191 173 160 145 133 124 118 110 105

4,5 176 160 149 136 124 116 110 105 096

5,0 161 149 138 127 117 108 104 100 095

End of table D.4

Conditional reduced flexibility The value of φ e at relative eccentricity m

7,0 8,0 9,0 10 12 14 17 20

0,5 125 111 100 091 077 067 058 048

1,0 121 109 098 090 077 066 055 046

1,5 119 108 096 088 077 065 053 045

2,0 117 106 095 086 076 064 052 045

2,5 113 103 093 083 074 062 051 044

3,0 110 100 091 081 071 061 051 043

3,5 106 096 088 078 069 059 050 042

4,0 100 093 084 076 067 057 049 041

4,5 096 089 079 073 065 055 048 040

Notes

1 The values ​of the coefficients φ e in the table are increased by 1000 times.

2 The values ​of φ e should be taken to be no greater than the values ​of φ .

Table D.5 - Reduced relative eccentricities m ef for eccentrically compressed rods with hinged ends

Moment diagrams The value of m ef when m ef , 1 , is equal to

0,1 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0 3,0 4,0 5,0 7,0 10,0 20,0
1 0,10 0,30 0,68 1,12 1,60 2,62 3,55 4,55 6,50 9,40 19,40

2 0,10 0,17 0,39 0,68 1,03 1,80 2,75 3,72 5,65 8,60 18,50

3 0,10 0,10 0,22 0,36 0,55 1,17 1,95 2,77 4,60 7,40 17,20

4 0,10 0,10 0,10 0,18 0,30 0,57 1,03 1,78 3,35 5,90 15,40

5 0,10 0,10 0,10 0,10 0,15 0,23 0,48 0,95 2,18 4,40 13,40

6 0,10 0,10 0,10 0,10 0,10 0,15 0,18 0,40 1,25 3,00 11,40

7 0,10 0,10 0,10 0,10 0,10 0,10 0,10 0,10 0,50 1,70 9,50

1 0,10 0,31 0,68 1,12 1,60 2,62 3,55 4,55 6,50 9,40 19,40

2 0,10 0,22 0,46 0,73 1,05 1,88 2,75 3,72 5,65 8,60 18,50

3 0,10 0,17 0,38 0,58 0,80 1,33 2,00 2,77 4,60 7,40 17,20

4 0,10 0,14 0,32 0,49 0,66 1,05 1,52 2,22 3,50 5,90 15,40

5 0,10 0,10 0,26 0,41 0,57 0,95 1,38 1,80 2,95 4,70 13,40

6 0,10 0,16 0,28 0,40 0,52 0,95 1,25 1,60 2,50 4,00 11,50

7 0,10 0,22 0,32 0,42 0,55 0,95 1,10 1,35 2,20 3,50 10,80

1 0,10 0,32 0,70 1,12 1,60 2,62 2,55 4,55 6,50 9,40 19,40

2 0,10 0,28 0,60 0,90 1,28 1,96 2,75 3,72 5,65 8,40 18,50

3 0,10 0,27 0,55 0,84 1,15 1,75 2,43 3,17 4,80 7,40 17,20

4 0,10 0,26 0,52 0,78 1,10 1,60 2,20 2,83 4,00 6,30 15,40

5 0,10 0,25 0,52 0,78 1,10 1,55 2,10 2,78 3,85 5,90 14,50

6 0,10 0,28 0,52 0,78 1,10 1,55 2,00 2,70 3,80 5,60 13,80

7 0,10 0,32 0,52 0,78 1,10 1,55 1,90 2,60 3,75 5,50 13,00
 1 0,10 0,40 0,80 1,23 1,68 2,62 3,55 4,55 6,50 9,10 19,40

2 0,10 0,40 0,78 1,20 1,60 2,30 3,15 4,10 5,85 8,60 18,50

3 0,10 0,40 0,77 1,17 1,55 2,30 3,10 3,90 5,55 8,13 18,00

4 0,10 0,40 0,75 1,13 1,55 2,30 3,05 3,80 5,30 7,60 17,50

5 0,10 0,40 0,75 1,10 1,55 2,30 3,00 3,80 5,30 7,60 17,00

6 0,10 0,40 0,75 1,10 1,50 2,30 3,00 3,80 5,30 7,60 16,50

7 0,10 0,40 0,75 1,10 1,40 2,30 3,00 3,80 5,30 7,60 16,00

Designations adopted in Table D.5:

Coefficient c max for calculating the stability of compressed rods of open cross-section

1 The coefficient c max for sections of types 1, 2, 3, shown in the figures in Table D.6 , should be calculated using the formula

(D.1)

Where

(D.2)

α = a x / h - the ratio of the distance a x between the center of gravity and the center of curvature of the section to the height of the section h ;

e x = M x / N is the eccentricity of the application of the compressive force relative to the x - x axis , taken with its own sign (in Table D.6 it is given
with the “plus” sign);

A - cross-sectional area.

ρ = ( I x + I y )/( Ah 2 ) + α 2 ;

ω = I ω /( I y h 2 ) - here I ω is the sectorial moment of inertia of the section;

I t = ( k /3) ∑b i t i 3 is the moment of inertia of the section under free torsion, b i and t i are the width and thickness of the sheets, respectively, forming
the section, including the web; k = 1.29 - for an I-section with two axes of symmetry; k = 1.25 - for an I-section with one axis of symmetry; k = 1.20 -
for a T-section, k = 1.12 - for a channel (U-shaped) section.

2 The coefficient c max when calculating the stability of a U-shaped section rod under central compression (type 4 with the designations adopted in
Table D.6 , and I y > I x ) should be calculated using formula ( D.1 ) with е x = 0 and β = 0 (then B = 1), taking into account that

A = ht f (2 + n );

I ω = t f h 3 b 2 (3 + 2 η )/[12(6 + η )] = Ah 2 b 2 (3 + 2 η )/[12(6 + η )(2 + η )];

I y = ht f b 2 (6 + η )/12 = Ab 2 (6 + η )/[12(2 + η )];

I x = t f h 3 (1 + 2 η )/[3(2 + η )] = Ah 2 (1 + 2 η )/[3(2 + η ) 2 ].
3 The coefficient c max when calculating the stability of a channel section rod (type 5 with the designations adopted in Table D.6 , and I x > I y ), should
be calculated using formula (D.3)

(D.3)

Where

δ=4ρ/μ;

μ = 8 ω + 0.156 I t λ x 2 /( Ab 2 ) + α 2 ;

α = а y / tb - the ratio of the distance а y between the center of gravity and the center of curvature of the section to the width of the section b - see
table D.6 ;

a y = 4 η 1 b (3 η 1 + 1)/[(2 η 1 + 1)(6 η 1 + 1)];

ρ = ( I x + I y )/( Ab 2 ) + α 2 ;

; b i and t i are, respectively, the width and thickness of the sheets forming the section;

ω = I ω /( I x b 2 ) - see table D.6 .

In this case:

A = ht w (2 η 1 + 1);

I ω = η 1 t w h 3 b 2 (3 η 1 + 2)/[12 (6 η 1 + 1)];

I y = 2 η 1 t w hb 2 ( η 1 2 + 2.5 η 1 + 1) / (2 η 1 + 1) 2 ;

I x = t w h 3 (6 η 1 + 1)/12.

Formulas for determining ω , α and β or their values ​are given in Table D.6.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

Table D.6 - Coefficients ω , α and β

Cross-section oh a b

type scheme

1 0,25 0 0

2 According to formula (Ж.12) of Appendix Ж

 3 0 Same

4 0

5 0

Designations adopted in Table D.6:

I 1 and I 2 are the moments of inertia of the larger and smaller belts, respectively, relative to the axis of symmetry of the section y - y .

η = bt w / ht f , η 1 = bt f / ht w , where t w is the wall thickness; t f is the flange thickness.

4 The stability calculation of eccentrically compressed I-section elements with two axes of symmetry, continuously reinforced along one of the
shelves (Figure D.1), should be performed using formula ( 111 ), in which the coefficient c = c max should be calculated using the formula

(D.4)

Figure D.1 - Diagram of a section of an element reinforced along a shelf

The coefficient α should be determined using formula ( G.4 ) of Appendix G.

When determining α, the value of l ef should be taken as equal to the distance between the sections of the element, secured from rotation relative to
the longitudinal axis (the distance between the attachment points of ties, spacers, etc.).

The eccentricity е x = M x / N in formula ( D.4 ) is considered positive if the point of application of the force is shifted towards the free shelf; for
centrally compressed elements е x = 0.

When determining е x for the design moment М x, the largest moment within the design length l ef of the element should be taken.

Appendix E
Coefficients for calculating structural elements taking into account the development of plastic deformations
Table E.1 - Coefficients c x , c y , n

Section type Sectional diagram The highest values ​of the coefficients

cx cy n at M y = 0 *

1 0,25 1,19 1,47 1,5

0,5 1,12

1,0 1,07

2,0 1,04

2 0,5 1,40 1,47 2,0

1,0 1,28

2,0 1,18

3 0,25 1,19 1,07 1,5

0,5 1,12 1,12

1,0 1,07 1,19

2,0 1,04 1,26

4 0,5 1,40 1,12 2,0

1,0 1,28 1,20

2,0 1,18 1,31

5 - 1,47 1,47

a) 2.0

b) 3.0
 6 0,25 1,47 1,04 3,0

0,5 1,07

1,0 1,12

2,0 1,19

7 - 1,26 1,26 1,5

8 - 1,60 1,47

a) 3.0

b) 1.0

9 0,5 1,60 1,07

1,0 1,12 a) 3.0

2,0 13,19 b) 1.0

__________

* For M y ≠ 0, n = 1.5 should be taken , with the exception of section type 5 a), for which n = 2, and type 5 b), for which n = 3.

Notes

1 The coefficients for intermediate values ​of A f / A w should be determined by linear interpolation.

2 The value of the coefficients c x , c y should be taken as no more than 1.15 γ f , where γ f is the load safety factor, defined as the ratio of the
calculated value of the equivalent (by the value of the bending moment) load to the standard one.

Table E.2 - Coefficients a 1 , a 2 , a 3 for calculating the bending of rectangular slabs supported on four and three sides

Plates At b / a

1,0 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,4 1,5 1,6 1,7 1,8 1,9 2,0 >2
 Supported on four sides a1 0,048 0,055 0,063 0,069 0,075 0,081 0,086 0,091 0,094 0,098 0,100 0,125

a2 0,048 0,049 0,050 0,050 0,050 0,050 0,049 0,048 0,048 0,047 0,046 0,037

Supported on three sides a3 At a 1 / d 1

0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0 1,2 1,4 2,0 >2

0,060 0,074 0,088 0,097 0,107 0,112 0,120 0,126 0,132 0,133

Designations adopted in Table E.2:

b - long side; a - short side; d 1 - length of the free side; a 1 - length of the side perpendicular to the free side.

Appendix G
Bending stability coefficient ψ in

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

G.1 The coefficient φ b for calculating the stability of bending elements of I-, T- and channel sections should be determined depending on the
arrangement of ties that brace the compressed chord, the type of load and the place of its application. It is assumed that the load acts in the plane of
greatest rigidity ( I x > I y ), and the support sections are secured against lateral displacements and rotation.

G.2 For a beam and a cantilever of an I-section with two axes of symmetry, the coefficient should be taken equal to:

at φ 1 ≤ 0.85

φb=φ1; (W.1)

at φ 1 > 0.85

φ b = 0.68 + 0.21 φ 1 ≤ 1, (W.2)

where the value of φ 1 should be calculated using the formula

(W.3)

where ψ is a coefficient calculated according to the requirements of G.3 ;

h - the total height of the rolled I-beam section or the distance between the axes of the belts (packages of belt sheets) of the composite I-beam;

l ef - the calculated length of a beam or cantilever, determined in accordance with 8.4.2 .

G.3 The value of the coefficient ψ in the formula ( G.3 ) should be calculated using the formulas in tables G.1 and G.2 depending on the number of
fastenings of the compressed belt, the type of load and the place of its application, as well as on the coefficient α , equal to:

a) for rolled I-beams

(W.4)

where I t is the moment of inertia during free torsion, determined according to Appendix D ;

h - full height of the section;

b) for composite I-beams made of sheets with welded or friction belt joints

(W.5)

where for welded I-beams made of three sheets:

t f and b f - thickness and width of the beam flange;

h - distance between the axes of the belts;

a = 0.5 h ;

t - wall thickness ( t = t w );

for composite I-beams with friction belt connections:

t f - total thickness of the sheets of the belt and the shelf of the belt angle;

b f - width of the belt sheets;

h - distance between the axes of the belt sheet packages;

a - the width of the vertical shelf of the waist corner minus the thickness of its shelf;

t - total thickness of the wall and vertical shelves of the belt angles.

If on the beam section l ef the M x diagram differs in outline from those given in Table G.1 , then the value of ψ is determined using the formulas for
the diagram M x that is closest in outline , into which the actual diagram can be inscribed.

In cases where the beam console has a compressed chord secured against lateral movement at the end or along its length, the value of ψ is taken to
be equal to:

for a concentrated load applied to the stretched belt at the end of the console, ψ = 1.75 ψ 1 , where the value of ψ 1 should be taken in accordance
with the note to Table G.1 ;

in other cases - as for a console without fastenings.

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 1 )

G.4 For a split I-section beam with one axis of symmetry (Figure G.1 ), the coefficient φ b should be determined according to Table G.3 , where the
values ​of φ 1 , φ 2 and n should be calculated using the formulas:

(W.6)

(W.7)

(W.8)

In formulas ( Ж.6 ) - ( Ж.8 ) it is indicated:

ѱ a - coefficient calculated by the formula

(W.9)

h - distance between the axes of the belts;

h 1 and h 2 - the distance from the center of gravity of the section to the axis of the more developed and less developed belts, respectively;
l ef - calculated length of the beam, determined according to 8.4.2 ;

I 1 and I 2 are the moments of inertia of the section of the more developed and less developed belts relative to the axis of symmetry of the beam
section, respectively.

Table G.1 - Coefficient ѱ for I-section beams with two axes of symmetry

Number of fastenings of the Type of load in the M x diagram on the The belt to which the load Coefficient ѱ for values ​of α
compressed belt in the span span l ef section is applied,

0.1 ≤ α ≤ 40 < α ≤ 400

40

Without fixed Focused Compressed 1.75 + 3.3 + 0.053 a -

0.09 a 4.5·10 - 5 a 2

Stretched 5.05 + 6.6 + 0.053 a -

0.09 a 4.5·10 - 5 a 2

Evenly distributed Compressed 1.60 3.15 + 0.04 a -

+0.08 a 2.7·10 - 5 a 2

Stretched 3.80 + 5.35 +0.04 a -

0.08 a 2.7·10 - 5 a 2

Two or more, dividing span I into Any Any 2.25 + 3.6 + 0.04 a -
equal parts 0.07 a 3.5·10 -5 a 2

One in the middle Concentrated in the Any 1.75 ѱ 1

middle

Concentrated in a Compressed 1.14 ѱ 1

quarter

Stretched 1.60 ѱ 1

Evenly distributed Compressed 1.14 ѱ 1

Stretched 1.30 ѱ 1

Note - The value of ѱ 1 should be taken equal to ѱ for two or more fastenings of the compressed chord in the span.

Table G.2 - Coefficient ѱ for rigidly fixed I-section consoles with two axes of symmetry

Load type Belt to which the load is Coefficient ѱ in the absence of fastenings of the compressed belt and with
applied values ​of α

4 ≤ α ≤ 28 28 < α ≤ 100

Focused on the end of the Stretched 1.0 + 0.16 a 4.0 + 0.05 a

console

Compressed 6.2 + 0.08 a 7.0 + 0.05 a

 Evenly distributed Stretched

Figure G.1 - Diagram of an I-section with one axis of symmetry

Table G.3 - Coefficient φ b

Compressed Belt Coefficient φ b at value φ 1

up to 0.85 over 0.85

More developed φ1≤1

Less developed f2 0.68 + 0.21 φ 2 ≤ 1

G.5 The values ​of B , C and D in the formula ( G.9 ) are determined according to tables G.4 and G.5 depending on the coefficients:

δ = n + 0.734 b; (W.10)

μ = n + 1.145 b; (W.11)

(W.12)

(W.13)

where the values ​of n , b1 , h , I2 , lеf should be taken in accordance with this appendix, and I1 – in accordance with Appendix D.

The coefficient α in table G.5 should be determined using the formula ( G.4 ).

(Amended edition. Amendment No. 2 )

Table G.4 - Coefficient B

Section diagram and load application location Coefficient B under load

concentrated in the middle of the span evenly distributed provocative clean bend
 d m b

d-1 m-1 b

1-d 1-m -b

-d -m -b

Table G.5 - Coefficients C and D

Load type Coefficient C at cross-section Coefficient D

I-beam ( n ≤ 0.9) T-shaped ( n = 1.0)

Concentrated in the middle of the span 0.330 h 0.0826 a 3,265

Evenly distributed 0.481 h 0.1202 a 2,247

Evoking pure bending 0.101 h 0.0253 a 4,315

G.6 For an I-section with 0.9 < n < 3.0, the coefficient ѱ a should be determined by linear interpolation between the values ​obtained using formula
(232) for an I-section with n = 0.9 and for a T-section with n = 1.

For a T-section with a concentrated or uniformly distributed load and α < 40, the coefficients ѱ a should be multiplied by (0.8 + 0.004 α ).

In beams with a less developed compressed flange for n > 0.7 and 5 ≤ l ef / b 2 ≤ 25, the value of the coefficient φ 2 must be reduced by multiplying by
(1.025 - 0.015 l ef / b 2 ) and should be taken as no more than 0.95. Values ​of l ef / b 2 > 25 are not allowed in such beams.

G.7 For a beam of channel section, the coefficient φ b should be taken equal to φ b = 0.7 φ 1 , where φ 1 should be determined as for beams of
doubly symmetric I-section, using formulas ( G.3 ) and ( G.4 ), where the values ​of I x , I y , I t should be taken for the channel.

Appendix I
Coefficients of the calculated length μ of sections of stepped columns

I.1 The coefficient of the calculated length μ 1 for the lower section of a single-stage column clamped at the base should be taken as:

with the upper end of the columns free from fastenings - according to Table I.1 ;

when fixing the upper end from rotation, but the possibility of its free movement - according to table I.2 ;

when fixing the upper end from displacement according to the formula
 (I.1)

where μ 12 and μ 11 are the coefficients of the calculated length of the lower section of the column under loads F 1 = 0 and F 2 = 0, respectively,
determined with hinged support of the upper end according to Table I.3 , and with rotational fastening - according to Table I.4 .

Tables I.1 - I.4 indicate:

where I 1 , I 2 , l 1 , l 2 are the moments of inertia of the sections and the lengths of the lower and upper sections of the column, respectively;

β = (F1 + F2)/F2.

I.2 The coefficient of the calculated length μ 2 for the upper section of a single-stage column in all cases should be determined by the formula

μ 2 = μ 1 / α 1 ≤ 3. (I.2)

I.3 The coefficient of the calculated length μ 1 for the lower section of a two-stage column clamped at the base (Figure I.1 , a) under the conditions of
fixing the upper end specified in Table I.5 , should be determined using the formula

(I.3)

где β1 = F1/F3; β2 = F2/F3; δ2 = l2/l1;

μm 1 , μm 2 , μm 3 - coefficients determined according to Table I.5 as for single-stage columns according to Figure I.1 , b, c, d);

Im 1 = ( I 1 l 1 + I 2 l 2 )/( l 1 + l 2 ) - the reduced value of the moment of inertia of the cross-section of a section of length ( l 1 + l 2 ).

Here F 1 , F 2 , F 3 are longitudinal forces applied to the top of the lower, middle and upper sections of the columns with moments of inertia I 1 , I 2 , I 3
and lengths l 1 , l 2 , l 3 , respectively.

The given value of the moment of inertia of the section of length ( l 2 + l 3 ) in Figure I.1 , b should be determined using the formula

Im 2 = ( I 2 l 2 + I 3 l 3 )/( l 2 + l 3 ).

Figure I.1 - Diagram of a two-stage column (a) and conditional loading diagrams
when applying forces F 1 , F 2 and F 3 to the lower (b),
middle (c), and upper (d) sections, respectively
I.4 The coefficients of the calculated length: μ 2 for the middle section of a two-stage column of length l 2 and μ 3 for the upper section of the column
of length l 3 should be determined using the formulas:

μ2=μ1/α2; (I.4)

μ 3 = μ 1 / α 3 ≤ 3, (I.5)

Where

Table I.1 - Calculation length factors μ 1 for single-stage columns with an upper end free from fastenings

Calculation a1 Coefficient μ 1 at value n

scheme

0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2,0 2,5 5,0 10,0 20,0

0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0 2,0

0,2 2,0 2,01 2,02 2,03 2,04 2,05 2,06 2,06 2,07 2,08 2,09 2,10 2,12 2,14 2,15 2,17 2,21 2,40 2,76 3,38

0,4 2,0 2,04 2,08 2,11 2,23 2,18 2,21 2,25 2,28 2,32 2,35 2,42 2,48 2,54 2,60 2,66 2,80 - - -

0,6 2,0 2,11 2,20 2,28 2,36 2,44 2,52 2,59 2,66 2,73 2,80 2,93 3,05 3,17 3,28 3,39 - - - -

0,8 2,0 2,25 2,42 2,56 2,70 2,83 2,96 3,07 3,17 3,27 3,36 3,55 3,74 - - - - - - -

1,0 2,0 2,50 2,73 2,94 3,13 3,29 3,44 3,59 3,74 3,87 4,0 - - - - - - - - -

1,5 3,0 3,43 3,77 4,07 4,35 4,61 4,86 5,05 - - - - - - - - - - - -

2,0 4,0 4,44 4,90 5,29 5,67 6,03 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2,5 5,0 5,55 6,08 6,56 7,00 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

3,0 6,0 6,65 7,25 7,82 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Table I.2 - Calculation length factors μ 1 for single-stage columns with the upper end secured only against rotation

Calculation a1 Coefficient μ 1 at value n

scheme

0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2,0 2,5 5,0 10,0 20,0
 0 2,0 1,92 1,86 1,80 1,76 1,70 1,67 1,64 1,60 1,57 1,55 1,50 1,46 1,43 1,40 1,37 1,32 1,13 1,10 1,05

0,2 2,0 1,93 1,87 1,82 1,76 1,71 1,68 1,64 1,62 1,59 1,56 1,52 1,48 1,45 1,41 1,39 1,33 1,20 1,11 -

0,4 2,0 1,94 1,88 1,83 1,77 1,75 1,72 1,69 1,66 1,62 1,61 1,57 1,53 1,50 1,48 1,45 1,40 - - -

0,6 2,0 1,95 1,91 1,86 1,83 1,79 1,77 1,76 1,72 1,71 1,69 1,66 1,63 1,61 1,59 - - - - -

0,8 2,0 1,97 1,94 1,92 1,90 1,88 1,87 1,86 1,85 1,83 1,82 1,80 1,79 - - - - - - -

1,0 2,0 2,00 2,00 2,00 2,00 2,00 2,00 2,00 2,00 2,00 2,00 - - - - - - - - -

1,5 2,0 2,12 2,25 233 2,38 2,43 2,48 2,52 - - - - - - - - - - - -

2,0 2,0 2,45 2,66 2,81 2,91 3,00 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2,5 2,5 2,94 3,17 3,34 3,50 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

3,0 3,0 3,43 3,70 3,93 4,12 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Table I.3 - Calculated length factors μ 12 and μ 11 for single-stage columns with a fixed hinged-supported upper end

Calculation scheme Coefficients μ 12 and μ 11 at l 2 / l 1

0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2,0

Coefficient μ 12

0,04 1,02 1,84 2,25 2,59 2,85 3,08 3,24 3,42 3,70 4,00 4,55 5,25 5,80 6,55 7,20

0,06 0,91 1,47 1,93 2,26 2,57 2,74 3,05 3,05 3,24 3,45 3,88 4,43 4,90 5,43 5,94

0,08 0,86 1,31 1,73 2,05 2,31 2,49 2,68 2,85 3,00 3,14 3,53 3,93 4,37 4,85 5,28

0,1 0,83 1,21 1,57 1,95 2,14 2,33 2,46 2,60 2,76 2,91 3,28 3,61 4,03 4,43 4,85

0,2 0,79 0,98 1,23 1,46 1,67 1,85 2,02 2,15 2,28 2,40 2,67 2,88 3,11 3,42 3,71

0,3 0,78 0,90 1,09 1,27 1,44 1,60 1,74 1,86 1,98 2,11 2,35 2,51 2,76 2,99 3,25

0,4 0,78 0,88 1,02 1,17 1,32 1,45 1,58 1,69 1,81 1,92 2,14 2,31 2,51 2,68 2,88

0,5 0,78 0,86 0,99 1,10 1,22 1,35 1,47 1,57 1,67 1,76 1,96 2,15 2,34 2,50 2,76

1,0 0,78 0,85 0,92 0,99 1,06 1,13 1,20 1,27 1,34 1,41 1,54 1,68 1,82 1,97 2,10
 Coefficient μ 11

0,04 0,67 0,67 0,83 1,25 1,43 1,55 1,65 1.70 1,75 1,78 1,84 1,87 1,88 1,90 1,92

0,06 0,67 0,67 0,81 1,07 1,27 1,41 1,51 1,60 1,64 1,70 1,78 1,82 1,84 1,87 1,88

0,08 0,67 0,67 0,75 0,98 1.19 1,32 1,43 1,51 1,58 1,63 1,72 1,77 1,81 1,82 1,84

0,1 0,67 0,67 0,73 0,93 1,11 1,25 1,36 1,45 1,52 1,57 1,66 1,72 1,77 1,80 1,82

0,2 0,67 0,67 0,69 0,75 0,89 1,02 1,12 1,21 1,29 1,36 1,46 1,54 1,60 1,65 1,69

0,3 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,71 0,80 0,90 0,99 1,08 1,15 1,22 1,33 1,41 1,48 1,54 1,59

0,4 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,69 0,75 0,84 0,92 1,00 1,07 1,13 1,24 1,33 1,40 1,47 1,51

0,5 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,69 0,73 0,81 0,87 0,94 1,01 1,07 1,17 1,26 1,33 1,39 1,44

1,0 0,67 0,67 0,67 0,68 0,71 0,74 0,78 0,82 0,87 0,91 0,99 1,07 1,13 1,19 1,24

Table I.4 - Design length factors μ 12 and μ 11 for single-stage columns with a fixed upper end secured against rotation

Calculation scheme Coefficients μ 12 and μ 11 at l 2 / l 1

0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2,0

Coefficient μ 12

0,04 0,78 1,02 1,53 1,73 2,01 2,21 2,38 2,54 2,65 2,85 3,24 3,70 4,20 4,76 5,23

0,06 0,70 0,86 1,23 1,47 1,73 1,93 2,08 2,23 2,38 2,49 2,81 3,17 3,50 3,92 4,30

0,08 0,68 0,79 1,05 1,31 1,54 1,74 1,91 2,05 2,20 2,31 2,55 2,80 3,11 3,45 3,73

0,1 0,67 0,76 1,00 1,20 1,42 1,61 1,78 1,92 2,04 2,20 2,40 2,60 2,86 3,18 3,41

0,2 0,64 0,70 0,79 0,93 1,07 1,23 1,41 1,50 1,60 1,72 1,92 2,11 2,28 2,45 2,64

0,3 0,62 0,68 0,74 0,85 0,95 1,06 1,18 1,28 2,39 1,48 1,67 1,82 1,96 2,12 2,20

0,4 0,60 0,66 0,71 0,78 0,87 0,99 1,07 1,16 1,26 1,34 1,50 1,65 1,79 1,94 2,08

0,5 0,59 0,65 0,70 0,77 0,82 0,93 0,99 1,08 1,17 1,23 1,39 1,53 1,66 1,79 1,92

1,0 0,55 0,60 0,65 0,70 0,75 0,80 0,85 0,90 0,95 1,00 1,10 1,20 1,30 1,40 1,50
 Coefficient μ 11

0,04 0,66 0,68 0,75 0,94 1,08 1,24 1,37 1,47 1,55 1,64 1,72 1,78 1,81 1,85 1,89

0,06 0,65 0,67 0,68 0,76 0,94 1,10 1,25 1,35 1,44 1,50 1,61 1,69 1,74 1,79 1,82

0,08 0,64 0,66 0,67 0,68 0,84 1,00 1,12 1,25 1,34 1,41 1,53 1,62 1,68 1,75 1,79

0,1 0,64 0,65 0,65 0,65 0,78 0,92 1,05 1,15 1,25 1,33 1,45 1,55 1,62 1,68 1,71

0,2 0,62 0,64 0,65 0,65 0,66 0,73 0,83 0,92 1,01 1,09 1,23 1,33 1,41 1,48 1,54

0,3 0,60 0,63 0,64 0,65 0,66 0,67 0,73 0,8! 0,89 0,94 1,09 1,20 1,28 1,35 1,41

0,4 0,58 0,63 0,63 0,64 0,64 0,66 0,68 0,75 0,82 0,88 1,01 1,10 1,19 1,26 1,32

0,5 0,57 0,61 0,63 0,64 0,64 0,65 0,68 0,72 0,77 0,83 0,94 1,04 1,12 1,19 1,25

1,0 0,55 0,58 0,60 0,61 0,62 0,63 0,65 0,67 0,70 0,73 0,80 0,88 0,93 1,01 1,05

Table I.5 - Coefficients μ m 1 , μ m 2 , μ m 3

Condition for fixing the upper end of the column Values ​of the coefficients

μm1 μm2 m m3

with a conditional loading scheme according to the figure

I.1 , b) I.1 , c) I.1 , d)

Free from attachments 2,0 2,0 m1

( μ 1 - according to table I.4 at

Fixed against rotation, allows for displacement m1 m1 m1

( μ 1 - according to table I.2 with α 1 = 0) ( μ 1 - according to table I.2 at

It is hinged and does not allow displacement. m 11 m 11 m 12

( μ 1 - according to table I.3 ) ( μ 12 - according to table I.3 )

 Secured against rotation and displacement m 11 m 11 m 12

( μ 1 - according to table I.4 ) ( μ 12 - according to table I.4 )

Appendix K
To the calculation of elements for fatigue

Table K.1 - Groups of elements and connections in fatigue calculations

Element diagram and Element characteristic Group of

location of the design section elements

Base metal with rolled or machined edges 1

The same, with edges cut by machine gas cutting 2

Base metal with mechanically processed edges, with different widths and transition radii r , mm:

200 1

10 4

Base metal in friction joints 1

Base metal in bolts (precision class bolts)

A) connection in sections by opening:

a) with paired overlays 4

b) with one-sided overlays 5

Transition and rounding (gas cutting purity class 1 or milling) at α ≥ 72°, r ≥ 0.5 b 2

Rectangular shaped fittings welded end-to-end or into a T-joint to structural elements without 7
mechanical processing of the transition from the fitting to the element
Fittings welded butt-welded or T-welded to beam walls and chords, as well as to truss elements at 4
α ≤ 45°

Rectangular or trapezoidal shaped fittings welded to the beam chords with overlapping and 7
welding along the overlap contour without mechanical processing of the seams

Untreated butt weld; load perpendicular to weld; joined elements of equal width and thickness 4

Butt joint; joints of different widths or different thicknesses 5

The base metal at the transition to the butt weld with the weld reinforcement removed
mechanically:

a) when joining elements of the same thickness and width 2

b) the same, different thickness and width 3

Welded butt joints:

sheet element on a backing sheet (load perpendicular to the weld) 4

pipes on a backing ring 4

rolled sections butt joint 4

Welded sections of I-beams, T-beams and other types, welded with continuous longitudinal 2
seams under the action of force along the seam axis

Base metal with an auxiliary element attached by longitudinal seams, with α :

up to 45° 4

90° 7

Breakage of the belt sheet without mechanical processing of the transverse (frontal) seam 7
 Base metal with transverse weld; double-sided weld with smooth transition to base metal 4

Base metal of tensioned beam chords and truss elements near diaphragms and ribs welded with 5
fillet welds

Base metal at the transition to the transverse (frontal) fillet weld

Base metal in joints with flank welds (at the transition points from the element to the edges of the
flank welds):

a) with double flank seams 8

b) with flank and frontal seams 7

c) when transmitting force through the base metal 7

d) anchor cheeks for fastening steel cables 8

The base metal of the stretched diagonal pipe with the ratio of thickness to the outer diameter of
the belt pipe

tm/dm ≥ 1/14 7

1/20 ≤ tm/dm < 1/14 8

The base metal of the stretched diagonal pipe with the ratio of the diagonal and chord diameters
d d / d m = 0.4 ÷ 0.7 and the ratio of the thickness to the outer diameter of the chord pipe:

tm/dm ≥ 1/14 6

1/20 ≤ tm/dm < 1/14 7

1/35 < tm/dm < 1/20 8

Bibliography
[ 1 ] Federal Law of July 22, 2008 No. 123-FZ “Technical Regulations on Fire Safety Requirements”
 Key words : steel building structures of buildings and structures, special operating conditions of steel structures, design characteristics of
materials and connections, flanged connections, milled ends, stress-strain state of elements, elastic, elastic-plastic and plastic work, methodology,
stability, strength, coefficients, nodes, rods, centrally and eccentrically compressed, bending elements, design of steel structures, prevention of
brittle fracture, groups of steel structures, structural elements, columns, racks, trusses, connections, purlins, beams, crane runway beams, sheet
structures, hanging structures, structures of overhead power transmission line supports, open switchgear and transport contact networks, antenna
structures

(Added additionally. Amendment No. 1 )